1 quick guide 11 2 basic function 31 3 navigation ......1 gs_navi+mm_om30g43u_(u) 17.06.28 15:01 1...

371
1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 227 6 INFORMATION 245 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 249 8 PHONE 279 9 LEXUS ENFORM 321 10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 343 INDEX 351 For more information about the following items, see the “Owner’s Manual”. Air conditioning Energy monitor (GS 450h) Fuel consumption Vehicle customization settings

Upload: others

Post on 03-Sep-2021

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

11

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 QUICK GUIDE 11

2 BASIC FUNCTION 31

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75

4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 227

6 INFORMATION 245

7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 249

8 PHONE 279

9 LEXUS ENFORM 321

10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 343

INDEX 351

For more information about the following items, see the “Owner’s Manual”.• Air conditioning• Energy monitor (GS 450h)• Fuel consumption• Vehicle customization settings

Page 2: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

2

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Introduction

This manual explains the operation of the system. Please read this manual carefully toensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the system differ depend-ing on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data available atthe time of producing this document.In some situations when changing between screens, it may take longer than normal forthe screen to change, the screen may be blank momentarily or noise may be displayed.Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from the system insome cases, such as when the system’s software is updated.

NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL

Page 3: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

3

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accesso-ries ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals andother vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locatinga desired destination.The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present startinglocation to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destinationthat is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The cal-culated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own per-sonal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you toeasily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the da-tabase, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the sys-tem will guide you there.The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructionswill announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching anintersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and aretimed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations thatmay affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position de-pends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circum-stances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to page 139.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)

Page 4: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

4

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

WARNING

●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning isignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk ofinjury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

●This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipmentif the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order toavoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

Safety symbolThe symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pressing, turning, etc.)used to operate switches and other devic-es.

Page 5: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

5

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETSNEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLESDifferent writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles

Example

When the engine*1 <power>*2 switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON*1 <ON>*2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will beginoperating.

*1: Vehicles with gasoline engine

*2: Vehicles with hybrid system

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No. Name Description

Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information Useful information for the user is described.

Page 6: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

6

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe operationof the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-serve all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire manual to makesure you understand the system. Do not al-low other people to use this system untilthey have read and understood the instruc-tions in this manual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavailablescreen buttons are dimmed.

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.This system is intended to assist in reachingthe destination and, if used properly, can doso. The driver is solely responsible for thesafe operation of your vehicle and the safetyof your passengers.Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe operationof the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-serve all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire manual to makesure you understand the system. Do not al-low other people to use this system untilthey have read and understood the instruc-tions in this manual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavailablescreen buttons are dimmed. Only when thevehicle is not moving, can the destinationand route selection be done.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

WARNING

●For safety, the driver should not operatethe system while he/she is driving. Insuffi-cient attention to the road and traffic maycause an accident.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

Page 7: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

7

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

While driving, listen to the voice instructionsas much as possible and glance at thescreen briefly and only when it is safe. How-ever, do not totally rely on voice guidance.Use it just for reference. If the system can-not determine the current position correct-ly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, ornon-voice guidance.The data in the system may occasionally beincomplete. Road conditions, includingdriving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,before following any instructions from thesystem, look to see whether the instructioncan be done safely and legally.This system cannot warn about such thingsas the safety of an area, condition of streets,and availability of emergency services. If un-sure about the safety of an area, do not driveinto it. Under no circumstances is this sys-tem a substitute for the driver’s personaljudgement.Use this system only in locations where it islegal to do so. Some states/provinces mayhave laws prohibiting the use of video andnavigation screens next to the driver.

WARNING

●For safety, the driver should not operatethe navigation system while he/she isdriving. Insufficient attention to the roadand traffic may cause an accident.

●While driving, be sure to obey the trafficregulations and maintain awareness ofthe road conditions. If a traffic sign on theroad has been changed, route guidancemay not have the updated informationsuch as the direction of a one way street.

Page 8: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. BASIC FUNCTION......................................... 12

Remote Touch........................................................... 12“Menu” SCREEN .................................................... 14HOME SCREEN .................................................... 18

2. QUICK REFERENCE .................................. 20

“Setup” SCREEN....................................................20“Information” SCREEN........................................ 22

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION .................. 24

REGISTERING HOME...................................... 24REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS ................................................25OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE

ROUTE.................................................................... 26SETTING HOME AS THE

DESTINATION................................................... 27

4. FUNCTION INDEX...................................... 28

FUNCTION INDEX ............................................28

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ............................................... 32

INITIAL SCREEN.................................................. 32HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch ............. 34HOME SCREEN OPERATION.................... 36ENTERING LETTERS AND

NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION ...................................................... 38

SCREEN ADJUSTMENT....................................41LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION

DISPLAY AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................................................................. 43

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS................................. 44

REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE......................................... 44

SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS.....................50

3. OTHER SETTINGS .........................................61

GENERAL SETTINGS.........................................61VOICE SETTINGS................................................67VEHICLE SETTINGS.......................................... 69

1 QUICK GUIDE 2 BASIC FUNCTION

Page 9: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

9

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. BASIC OPERATION ..................................... 76

QUICK REFERENCE .........................................76MAP SCREEN OPERATION.........................79MAP SCREEN INFORMATION ................. 84TRAFFIC INFORMATION.............................. 90

2. DESTINATION SEARCH ...........................93

DESTINATION SEARCH OPERATION.......................................................93

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ..............105

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE .................................. 110

ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN.................... 110TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS .............................................................117EDITING ROUTE................................................. 118

4. MEMORY POINTS .................................... 122

MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS................... 122

5. SETUP ..............................................................132

DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS ........................................................... 132

TRAFFIC SETTINGS.......................................... 137

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM........................................................ 139

GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .............................................................. 139

MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA ........................................... 142

1. BASIC OPERATION ................................... 146

QUICK REFERENCE ....................................... 146SOME BASICS.....................................................148

2. RADIO OPERATION ................................ 157

AM/FM RADIO ................................................... 157XM Satellite Radio ............................................... 167INTERNET RADIO ............................................. 174

3. MEDIA OPERATION ................................ 175

CD ...............................................................................175DVD ........................................................................... 178USB MEMORY.................................................... 183iPod............................................................................. 187Bluetooth® AUDIO............................................ 192AUX........................................................................... 198

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS ..............................................202

STEERING SWITCHES ..................................202REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROL

SWITCHES ........................................................205

5. SETUP ............................................................ 208

AUDIO SETTINGS ...........................................208

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ....................213

OPERATING INFORMATION .................. 213

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION.............................................228

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM..................228CASUAL

SPEECH RECOGNIZATION ................236COMMAND LIST ............................................. 237

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION.............................................242

MOBILE ASSISTANT ...................................... 242

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY ...................... 246

RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION............................................. 246

DATA SERVICES SETTINGS...................... 247

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

6 INFORMATION

Page 10: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS

10

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR ................................................. 250

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR....................................... 250

ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE..................................................................255

PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE............................................257

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS..............................................259

THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ............264

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST............... 266

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ....................266INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

SETTING............................................................. 277

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) ..........................280

QUICK REFERENCE ..................................... 280SOME BASICS..................................................... 281CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE .............................................................. 285RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ................................................................ 291TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ...............................................................292Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION.......................................................295

2. SETUP .............................................................300

PHONE SETTINGS ......................................... 300

3. WHAT TO DO IF... ...................................... 312

TROUBLESHOOTING................................... 312

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW............. 322

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW....................... 322TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY

USING A CELLULAR PHONE.............. 324TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY

USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...........................328

TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM......................................................331

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION.......... 332

LEXUS Enform Remote................................... 332LEXUS Enform Service Connect ................333LEXUS App Suite ............................................... 334LEXUS Enform Destinations ......................... 339

3. SETUP ............................................................. 340

LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS ......................340

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION .... 344

12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW.......... 344USING SIDE DISPLAY................................... 346

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.............................. 352

7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

8 PHONE

9 LEXUS ENFORM

10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY

INDEX

Page 11: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

1

11

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. Remote Touch ............................................... 12

2. “Menu” SCREEN ......................................... 14STATUS DISPLAY...................................................... 16

3. HOME SCREEN ......................................... 18

1. “Setup” SCREEN ........................................ 20

2. “Information” SCREEN............................. 22

1. REGISTERING HOME............................ 24

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS...................................... 25

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE .............................................. 26

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ........................................ 27

1. FUNCTION INDEX .................................. 28

1 BASIC FUNCTION

2 QUICK REFERENCE

3 NAVIGATION OPERATION

4 FUNCTION INDEX

QUICK GUIDE

Page 12: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

12

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1. Remote Touch

*1: With 12.3-inch display*2: With 8-inch display

*1

*2

Page 13: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

1. BASIC FUNCTION

13

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Name Function Page

“MAP” buttonPress to display the current position, cancel thescreen scroll, start guidance, and repeat a voiceguidance.

76, 79

“ · ” button Press to scroll the list screen and to change thescale of the map*. 34, 39, 80

Back button Press to display the previous screen. 34

“MENU” button Press to display the “Menu” screen. 14

Remote Touch knob

Move in the desired direction to select a function,letter and screen button.Press to enter the selected function, letter orscreen button.

34

“ENTER” button Press to enter the selected function, letter orscreen button. 34

“HOME” button Press to display the home screen. 18, 36

*: With navigation system

Page 14: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

14

1. BASIC FUNCTION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. “Menu” SCREEN

With 8-inch display

With 12.3-inch display

To display this screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

Page 15: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

1. BASIC FUNCTION

15

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Function Page

Select to display the compass mode screen. ⎯

Select to display the radio control screen.146

Select to display the media control screen.

Select to display the hands-free operation screen. 280

Select to display the “Information” screen. 22

Select to display the air conditioning control screen. “Owner’s Manual”

Select to display the “Setup” screen. 20

Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn thescreen off, etc. 41

Select to display the “Destination” screen. 93

* Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. 334

*: This function is not made available on some models.

INFORMATION

●With 12.3-inch display: When the split-screen display is selected, the “Menu” screen will bedisplayed on the main display. (→P.344)

Page 16: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

16

1. BASIC FUNCTION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

STATUS DISPLAY

The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and theamount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status bar. This statusbar is shown on all modes.

No. Indicators Conditions

The condition ofthe Bluetooth®

connection

(Gray) (Blue)No connection Poor Good• An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built into the instru-

ment panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection maydeteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth®

phone is used in the following conditions and/or places:The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as whenit is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.

• Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of theBluetooth® connection is good.

Page 17: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

1. BASIC FUNCTION

17

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1

The level of re-ception

Poor Excellent• The level of reception does not always correspond with the level

displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not bedisplayed depending on the phone you have.When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a placeinaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

• “Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roam-ing, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.

• The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type ofphone you have.

The amount ofbattery chargeleft

Empty Full• The amount displayed does not always correspond with the

amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device.The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed dependingon the type of the Bluetooth® device connected.This system does not have a charging function.

No. Indicators Conditions

Page 18: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

18

1. BASIC FUNCTION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. HOME SCREEN*

Three-way split screen

To display this screen, press the “HOME” button on the Remote Touch.The home screen can display multiple information screens, such as the audio systemscreen and fuel consumption screen, simultaneously. When a screen is selected, theselected screen is switched to a full screen display.For details about setting the home screen: → P.36

*: With 8-inch display

Page 19: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

1. BASIC FUNCTION

19

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1Two-way split screen

Page 20: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

20

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Setup” SCREEN

To display this screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select“Setup”.

Page 21: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

2. QUICK REFERENCE

21

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Function Page

Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automaticscreen change settings, etc. 61

*1 Select to change the display items/area and the home screen layout. 36

Select to set the voice guidance settings. 67

Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices. 50

Select to set radio and external media settings. 208

*2 Select to set traffic information. 137

*3Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address bookentries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destina-tions.

122, 132

Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information. 69

Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc. 300

*2 Select to set LEXUS App Suite settings. 340

*2 Select to set data services settings. 247

*1: With 8-inch display*2: With 12.3-inch display (This function is not made available on some models.)*3: With 12.3-inch display

Page 22: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

22

2. QUICK REFERENCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. “Information” SCREEN

To display this screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select“Info”.

Page 23: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

2. QUICK REFERENCE

23

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Function Page

Select to display the energy monitor or fuel consumption screen. “Owner’s Manual”

*1 Select to display traffic information. 90

*2 Select to display weather information. 246

*1 Select to display the vehicle alert history. ⎯

*1: With 12.3-inch display (This function is not made available on some models.)*2: This function is not made available on some models.

Page 24: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

24

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. REGISTERING HOME*

Press the “MAP” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

Select “Go Home”.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for your home. (→P.93)

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.Registration of home is complete. Registering home in a different way

→P.123

Editing the name, location, phone num-ber and icon →P.123

Setting home as the destination →P.95

1

*: With 12.3-inch display

2

3

4

5

6

7

Page 25: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

25

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS*

Press the “MAP” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

Select one of the preset destinationbuttons.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for a destination. (→P.93)

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.Registration of preset destinations is com-plete.Registering preset destinations in a dif-

ferent way →P.124

Editing the name, location, phone num-ber and icon →P.125

Setting preset destinations as the desti-nation→P.95

1

*: With 12.3-inch display

2

3

4

5

6

7

Page 26: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

26

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE*

Press the “MAP” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for a destination. (→P.93)

Select “Go”.

Select “OK”.Selecting routes other than the one recom-mended (→P.105)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

1

*: With 12.3-inch display

2

3

4

5

Page 27: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

27

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION*

Press the “MAP” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

Select “Go Home”.

Select “OK”. Selecting routes other than the one recom-mended (→P.105)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

1

*: With 12.3-inch display

2

3

4

Page 28: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

28

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

4. FUNCTION INDEX

1. FUNCTION INDEX

Map*

Route guidance*

Displaying maps Page

Viewing the map screen 76

Displaying the current position 79

Viewing the current position vicinity map 82

Changing the scale 80

Changing the map orientation 81

Displaying map Information 84

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 111

Selecting the map mode 82

Displaying traffic information 90

Searching for destinations Page

Searching for the destination 93

Changing the search area 95

Before starting or during route guidance Page

Starting route guidance 105

Editing the route 118

Viewing the entire route map 112

Adjusting route guidance volume 67

Deleting the destination 119

Address book Page

Registering address book entries 126

Marking icons on the map 127

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 29: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

4. FUNCTION INDEX

29

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1Useful functions

Information Page

Displaying vehicle maintenance* 70

*: With 12.3-inch display

Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page

Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® phone 44

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 285

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 291

Voice command system Page

Operating the system with your voice 228

Peripheral monitoring system Page

Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle 250

Page 30: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

30

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Page 31: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

2

31

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 32

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch...... 34

3. HOME SCREEN OPERATION ........... 36

4. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION............................................ 38

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS....... 38

LIST SCREEN............................................................... 39

5. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ......................... 41

6. LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM...................................................... 43

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE............................... 44

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME .......................................... 44

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME ...................... 46

PROFILES ..................................................................... 48

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............ 50

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN................................ 50

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ........... 51

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE.................. 53

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ...... 53

EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION.................................................... 55

“System Settings” SCREEN.................................... 57

1. GENERAL SETTINGS............................... 61

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ........................ 61

2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 67

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN............................... 67

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS ................................ 69

MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 70

1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2 Bluetooth® SETTINGS

3 OTHER SETTINGS

BASIC FUNCTION

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 32: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

32

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN

1 When the engine <power> switch isturned to ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON <ON> mode, the initial screen willbe displayed and the system will beginoperating.

After a few seconds displays the initialscreen, the caution screen will be dis-played.Waiting about 5 seconds or selecting

“Continue” switches to the last displayedscreen. (Press any button on the RemoteTouch, the function’s corresponding screenwill be displayed.)

Images shown on the initial screen can bechanged to suit individual preferences.(→P.64)

CAUTION SCREEN*

WARNING

●When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running <the hybrid system oper-ating>, always apply the parking brake forsafety.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION*

This system reminds users when to re-place certain parts or components andshows dealer information (if registered)on the screen.When the vehicle reaches a previouslyset driving distance or date specified fora scheduled maintenance check, the“Maintenance Reminder” screen will bedisplayed when the system is turned on.

This screen goes off if the screen is notoperated for several seconds.To prevent this screen from being dis-

played again, select “Do Not DisplayThis Message Again”.To register maintenance information:

→P.70

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 33: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

33

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Press and hold the “PWR•VOL” knobfor 3 seconds or more.

RESTARTING THE SYSTEM

When system response is extremelyslow, the system can be restarted.

Page 34: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

34

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch

1 Use the Remote Touch knob to selectthe desired button on the screen.

2 To select a screen button, press theRemote Touch knob or an “ENTER”button. Once a button has been select-ed, the screen will change.

When the pointer moves close to a button,it will be automatically pulled onto that but-ton. The strength of this pull can beadjusted. (→P.61)The pointer will disappear from the screen

if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operationof the Remote Touch knob will cause thepointer to reappear. “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote Touch

can be used to scroll up and down on listscreens.With navigation system: Press the “ ” but-ton on the Remote Touch to zoom in on themap screen and the “ ” button to zoomout.

When is displayed on the screen,

select or press the button onthe Remote Touch to return to the previousscreen.Press the “MENU” button on the Remote

Touch to display the “Menu” screen. (→P.14)With 8-inch display: The home screen can

be displayed by pressing the “HOME” but-ton on the Remote Touch. (→P.18)With 12.3-inch display: The map screen can

be displayed by pressing the “MAP” buttonon the Remote Touch. (→P.79)

This system can be operated by theRemote Touch when the engine<power> switch is in ACCESSORY orIGNITION ON <ON> mode.

Page 35: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

35

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

WARNING

●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair tobecome caught in the Remote Touch asthis may cause an injury.

●Be careful when touching the RemoteTouch in extreme temperatures as it maybecome very hot or cold due to the tem-perature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

●Do not allow the Remote Touch to comeinto contact with food, liquid, stickers or litcigarettes as doing so may cause it tochange color, emit a strange odor or stopfunctioning.

●Do not subject the Remote Touch toexcessive pressure or strong impact asthe knob may bend or break off.

●Do not allow coins, contact lenses orother such items to become caught in theRemote Touch as this may cause it to stopfunctioning.

●Items of clothing may rip if they becomecaught on the Remote Touch knob.

●If your hand or any object is on theRemote Touch knob when the engine<power> switch is in ACCESSORYmode, the Remote Touch knob may notoperate properly.

INFORMATION

●Under extremely cold conditions, theRemote Touch knob may react slowly.

Page 36: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

36

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. HOME SCREEN OPERATION*

1 Press the “HOME” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Check that the home screen is dis-played.

When a screen is selected, the selectedscreen will change to a full screen display.

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Customize Home Screen”.

The home screen can display multipleinformation screens, such as the audiosystem screen and fuel consumptionscreen, simultaneously.

*: With 8-inch display

CUSTOMIZING THE HOME SCREEN

The display items/area on the homescreen and the home screen layout canbe changed.

Page 37: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

37

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

4 Check that “Customize Home Screen”is displayed.

■ CHANGING THE DISPLAYITEMS/AREA

1 Select the desired item.

2 Select the desired area.

■ CHANGING THE HOME SCREENLAYOUT

1 Select “Change Layout”.

2 Select the desired screen layout.

No. Function Page

Select to change the dis-play items/area. 37

Select to change the homescreen layout. 37

INFORMATION

●When the selected item is already beingdisplayed and another area is selected forthat item, the item that it is replacing willbe displayed in the original item’s loca-tion.

Page 38: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

38

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

4. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION

On certain letter entry screens, letters canbe entered in upper or lower case.

: Select to enter in lower case.

: Select to enter in upper case.

When searching by an address, name,etc., or entering data, letters and num-bers can be entered via the screen.

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS

No. Function

Select to enter desired characters.

Text field. Entered character(s) willbe displayed.

During character entry, when there isonly one available option for the nextcharacter(s), the next character(s)will be displayed in gray text in thetext field automatically. Gray text isentered by selecting this button.

Select to erase one character. Selectand hold to continue erasing charac-ters.

Select to display the alphabet keys.

Select to display other symbols.

Keyboard layout can be changed. (→P.61)

Page 39: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

39

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ SELECTING ALL ITEMS

1 Select “Select All”.

“Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list.

LIST SCREEN

LIST SCREEN OPERATION

When a list is displayed, use the appro-priate screen button to scroll throughthe list.With navigation system: The list screenmay be displayed after entering charac-ters.

Icon Function

Select to skip to the next or previ-ous page.

Select and hold or toscroll through the displayed list.

This indicates the displayedscreen’s position.

If appears to the right of anitem name, the complete name istoo long to display.

Select to scroll to the end ofthe name.

Select to move to the begin-ning of the name.

INFORMATION

●With navigation system: Matching itemsfrom the database are listed even if theentered address or name is incomplete.

●With navigation system: The list will bedisplayed automatically if the maximumnumber of characters is entered ormatching items can be displayed on a sin-gle list screen.

●With navigation system: The number ofmatching items is shown on the right sideof the screen. If the number of matchingitems is more than 999, the system dis-plays “∗∗∗” on the screen.

●The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the RemoteTouch can be used to scroll up and downon list screens.

Some lists contain “Select All”. If“Select All” is selected, it is possible toselect all items.

Page 40: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

40

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Sort”.

2 Select the desired sorting criteria.

1 Select the desired character jump but-tons.

SORTING*

The order of a list displayed on thescreen can be sorted in the order of dis-tance from the current location, date,category, etc.

*: With 12.3-inch display

CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS IN LISTS

Some lists contain character screen but-tons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow adirect jump to list entries that begin withthe same letter as the character screenbutton.

INFORMATION

●Every time the same character screenbutton is selected, the list starting with thesubsequent character is displayed.

Page 41: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

41

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

5. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Display”.

3 Select the items to be set.The contrast and brightness of thescreen display and the image of thecamera display can be adjusted. Thescreen can also be turned off, and/orchanged to either day or night mode.(For information regarding audio/visualscreen adjustment: →P.154)

No. Function Page

Select to turn the screen off.To turn it on, press any but-ton on the audio panel or onthe Remote Touch.

Select to turn day modeon/off. 42

Select to adjust the screendisplay.

42Select to adjust the cameradisplay.

Page 42: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

42

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Day Mode”.1 Select “General” or “Camera”.

2 Select the desired item. “Display (General)” screen only: Select “ ”

or “ ” to select the desired display.

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE

Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to dayor night mode. This feature is availablewhen the headlight is switched on.

INFORMATION

●If the screen is set to day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this conditionis memorized even with the engine<hybrid system> turned off.

ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS

The contrast and brightness of thescreen can be adjusted according to thebrightness of your surroundings.

Screen button Function

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken thescreen.

INFORMATION

●The side display will be adjusted to thesame image quality as the main display.

Page 43: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

43

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

6. LINKING MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The following functions of the navigation system are linked with the multi-informationdisplay in the instrument cluster:• Navigation*• Audio

etc.These functions can be operated using multi-information display control switches onthe steering wheel. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 44: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

44

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection settingof your cellular phone on.

This function is not available whenBluetooth® connection setting of your cel-lular phone is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

3 Select “Phone”.

Operations up to this point can also be per-

formed by pressing the switch on thesteering wheel.

4 Select “Yes” to register a phone.

5 When this screen is displayed, searchfor the device name displayed on thisscreen on the screen of yourBluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME

To use the hands-free system, it is neces-sary to register a Bluetooth® phone withthe system.Once the phone has been registered, itis possible to use the hands-free system.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.For details about registering aBluetooth® device: →P.51

Page 45: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

45

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

6 Register the Bluetooth® device usingyour Bluetooth® device.

A PIN code is not required for SSP (SecureSimple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®

devices. Depending on the type ofBluetooth® device being connected, amessage confirming registration may bedisplayed on the Bluetooth® device’sscreen. Respond and operate the Blue-tooth® device according to the confirma-tion message.

7 Check that the following screen is dis-played, indicating pairing was success-ful (a Bluetooth® link has beenestablished but registration is not yetcomplete).

The system waits for connection requestscoming from the registered device.

At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions arenot yet available.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

8 Check that “Connected” is displayedand registration is complete.

If displayed, select “OK” to complete theregistration process. If an error message is displayed, follow the

guidance on the screen to try again.

INFORMATION

●If a cellular phone does not operate prop-erly after being connected, turn the cellu-lar phone off and on and then connect itagain.

Page 46: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

46

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection settingof your audio player on.

This function is not available when theBluetooth® connection setting of youraudio player is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

3 Select “Radio” or “Media”.

4 Select “Source”.

5 Select “Bluetooth*”.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME

To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is nec-essary to register an audio player withthe system.Once the player has been registered, itis possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.For details about registering aBluetooth® device: →P.51

Page 47: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

47

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

6 Select “Connect”.

7 Select “Yes” to register a audio player.

8 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ABluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRSTTIME” from “STEP 5”. (→P.44)

Page 48: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

48

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PROFILES

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth® Device Spec. Function Require-

ments

Recom-menda-

tions

Bluetooth®

Phone/Bluetooth®

Audio Player

Bluetooth® SpecificationRegistering aBluetooth® de-vice

Ver.2.0 Ver.3.0 +EDR

Bluetooth® Device Profile Function Require-

ments

Recom-menda-

tions

Bluetooth®

Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.6

OPP (Object Push Profile)Transferring thecontacts

Ver.1.1 Ver.1.2

PBAP (Phone Book AccessProfile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.1

MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth®

phone message ⎯ Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile) “LEXUS AppSuite” function ⎯ Ver. 1.2

Bluetooth®

Audio Player

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distri-bution Profile) Bluetooth® au-

dio system

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3

AVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5

Page 49: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

49

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by BluetoothSIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or usingOPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.

●If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible,the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly.

●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® phones for thissystem.

Page 50: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

50

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Bluetooth*”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned by Blue-tooth SIG, Inc.

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN

Function Page

Registering a Bluetooth® device 51

Deleting a Bluetooth® device 53

Connecting a Bluetooth® device 53

Editing the Bluetooth® device in-formation 55

Bluetooth® system settings 57

Page 51: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

51

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

21 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select “Connect Phone”.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(→P.50)

2 Select “Add”.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-nected

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,select “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered

A registered device needs to be replaced.Select “Yes”, and select the device to bereplaced.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be reg-istered.

Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP)and audio players (AVP) can be regis-tered simultaneously.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 52: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

52

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3 When this screen is displayed, searchfor the device name displayed on thisscreen on the screen of yourBluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

4 Register the Bluetooth® device usingyour Bluetooth® device.

A PIN code is not required for SSP (SecureSimple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®

devices. Depending on the type ofBluetooth® device being connected, amessage confirming registration may bedisplayed on the Bluetooth® device’sscreen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® device according to the confir-mation message.

5 Check that the following screen is dis-played, indicating pairing was success-ful (a Bluetooth® link has beenestablished but registration is not yetcomplete).

The system waits for connection requestscoming from the registered device.

At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions arenot yet available.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

6 Check that “Connected” is displayedand registration is complete.

If displayed, select “OK” to complete theregistration process. If an error message is displayed, follow the

guidance on the screen to try again.

Page 53: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

53

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(→P.50)

2 Select “Remove”.

3 Select the desired device.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(→P.50)

2 Select the device to be connected.

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

: Phone

: Audio player

: Phone/“LEXUS App Suite” serviceThe profile icon for a currently connected

device will be displayed in color.Selecting a profile icon which is not cur-

rently connected will switch the connectionto the function.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

INFORMATION

●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, thecontact data will be deleted at the sametime.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones(HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can beregistered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth® device hasbeen registered, select which device toconnect to.

If the desired Bluetooth® device is not onthe list, select “Add” to register thedevice. (→P.51)

Page 54: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

54

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3 Select the desired connection.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the connection is com-plete.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

■ AUTO CONNECTION MODE

When the engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>mode, the system searches for a nearbyregistered device.The system will connect with the registered

device that was last connected, if it isnearby. When automatic connection prior-ity is set to on and there is more than oneregistered Bluetooth® phone available, thesystem will automatically connect to theBluetooth® phone with the highest priority.(→P.58)

■ CONNECTING MANUALLY

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Bluetooth*”.

4 Follow the steps in “CONNECTING ABluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.(→P.53)

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

INFORMATION

●It may take time if the device connectionis carried out during Bluetooth® audioplayback.

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

device being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thedevice.

●When disconnecting a Bluetooth®

device, it is recommended to disconnectusing the system.

To turn auto connection mode on, set“Bluetooth* Power” to on. (→P.58)Leave the Bluetooth® device in a loca-tion where the connection can be estab-lished.

When the auto connection has failed or“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it isnecessary to connect Bluetooth® man-ually.

Page 55: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

55

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®

PHONE

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(→P.50)

2 Select the desired device to be edited.

3 Select “Device Info”.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnecteddue to poor reception from theBluetooth® network when the engine<power> switch is in ACCESSORY orIGNITION ON <ON> mode, the sys-tem automatically reconnects theBluetooth® phone.

EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION

The Bluetooth® device’s informationcan be displayed on the screen. The dis-played information can be edited.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 56: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

56

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

4 Confirm and change the Bluetooth®

device information.

1 Select “Device Name”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

No. Information

The name of the Bluetooth® device.Can be changed to a desired name.(→P.56)

Select to set the Bluetooth® audioplayer connection method. (→P.57)

Device address is unique to the de-vice and cannot be changed.

Phone number of the Bluetooth®

phone.

Compatibility profile of theBluetooth® device.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

●If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis-tered with the same device name, thedevices can be distinguished referring tothe device’s address.

●Depending on the type of phone, someinformation may not be displayed.

CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

INFORMATION

●Even if the device name is changed, thename registered in your Bluetooth®

device does not change.

Page 57: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

57

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

21 Select “Connect Audio Player from”.

2 Select the desired connection method.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio sys-tem to the audio player.“Device”: Select to connect the audio play-er to the audio system.Depending on the audio player, the “Vehi-

cle” or “Device” connection method maybe best. As such, refer to the manual thatcomes with the audio player.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(→P.50)

2 Select “System Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

SETTING AUDIO PLAYER CONNECTION METHOD

“System Settings” SCREEN

The Bluetooth® settings can be con-firmed and changed.

No. Function Page

Select to set Bluetooth®

connection on/off. 58

Select to change the auto-matic connection priority ofthe registered Bluetooth®

devices.

58

Select to edit the system in-formation. 59

Select to reset all setupitems. ⎯

Page 58: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

58

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”.When “Bluetooth* Power” is on:

The Bluetooth® device is automaticallyconnected when the engine <power> switchis in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON<ON> mode.When “Bluetooth* Power” is off: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,and the system will not connect to it nexttime.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

1 Select “Preferred Device Settings”.

2 Select the desired item to be set.

CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”

INFORMATION

●While driving, the auto connection statecan be changed from off to on, but can-not be changed from on to off.

SETTING AUTOMATIC CONNECTION PRIORITY

The automatic connection priority of theregistered Bluetooth® devices can bechanged.

No. Function Page

Select to set automaticconnection priority on/off. ⎯

Select to change the auto-matic connection priority ofthe registered Bluetooth®

phones.

59

Select to change the auto-matic connection priority ofthe registered Bluetooth®

audio players.

59

Select to reset all setupitems. ⎯

INFORMATION

●A newly registered Bluetooth® devicewill automatically be given the highestautomatic connection priority.

Page 59: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

59

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ CHANGING PHONE AUTOMAT-IC CONNECTION PRIORITY

1 Select “Preferred Phones”.

2 Select the desired Bluetooth® deviceand select “Up” or “Down” to changethe preferred order.

■ CHANGING AUDIO PLAYER AU-TOMATIC CONNECTION PRIOR-ITY

1 Select “Preferred Audio Players”.

2 Select the desired Bluetooth® deviceand select “Up” or “Down” to changethe preferred order.

1 Select “System Information”.

2 Select the desired item to be set.

EDITING THE SYSTEM INFORMATION

Page 60: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

60

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ EDITING THE SYSTEM NAME

1 Select “System Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ EDITING THE PIN CODE

1 Select “System PIN Code”.

2 Enter a PIN code and select “OK”.

No. Information Page

Displays system name. Canbe changed to a desiredname.

60

PIN code used when theBluetooth® device wasregistered. Can bechanged to a desired code.

60

Device address is unique tothe device and cannot bechanged.

Select to set the phone con-nection status display on/off.

Select to set the connectionstatus display of the audioplayer on/off.

Compatibility profile of thesystem ⎯

Select to reset all setupitems. ⎯

Page 61: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

61

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

3. OTHER SETTINGS

1. GENERAL SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “General”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for automaticscreen change, operation sounds, etc.

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN

Page 62: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

62

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No. Function

Select to change the time zone, setthe daylight saving time on/off andset the automatic adjustment of theclock on/off. (→P.63)

Select to change the language.

Select to change the unit of measurefor distance/fuel consumption.

Select to change the screen buttoncolor.

Select to change the keyboard lay-out.

Select to customize the startup/screen off images. (→P.64)

*

Select to set automatic screenchanges from the audio/air condi-tioning control screen to the previ-ous screen to on/off. When set to on,the screen will automatically returnto the previous screen from the au-dio/air conditioning control screenafter 20 seconds.

Select to set the selection soundson/off.

Select to set the pointer sounds on/off.

Select to set the error sounds on/off.

Select to adjust the pointer soundvolume.

Select to adjust the strength of thepull from the buttons to the pointer.

Select to delete personal data. (→P.66)

Select to update software versions.For details, contact your Lexusdealer.

Select to update “Gracenote” data-base versions. For details, contactyour Lexus dealer.

Select to display the software infor-mation. Notices related to third partysoftware used in this product are en-listed. (This includes instructions forobtaining such software, where ap-plicable.)

No. Function

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 63: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

63

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(→P.61)

2 Select “Clock”.

3 Select the items to be set.

■ SETTING THE TIME ZONE

1 Select “Time Zone”.

2 Select the desired time zone. If “Other” is selected, the zone can be

adjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” toadjust the time zone.

■ MANUAL CLOCK SETTING

1 Select the desired item.

CLOCK SETTINGS

Used for changing the time zone andsetting of daylight saving time and auto-matic time adjustment on/off.

No. Function

Select to change the time zone. (→P.63)

Select to set daylight saving time on/off.

Select to set automatic adjustment ofthe clock by GPS on/off. When set toon, the system will automatically ad-just the clock to the current position’stime zone when the vehicle moves toa different time zone. When set to off,the clock can be manually adjusted.(→P.63)

When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned“Off”, the clock can be manually adjust-ed.

No. Function

Select “+” to set the time forwardone hour and “-” to set the time backone hour.

Select “+” to set the time forwardone minute and “-” to set the timeback one minute.

Select to round to the nearest hour.e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00

1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00

Page 64: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

64

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(→P.61)

2 Select “Customize Images”.

3 Select the items to be set.

■ TRANSFERRING IMAGES

1 Grip the knob to release the lock, andlift the armrest to open.

2 Open the cover and connect a device.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if itis not turned on.

3 Select “Copy from USB”.

CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES

An image can be copied from a USBmemory and used as the startup andscreen off Images.With 12.3-inch display: The built-in mov-ie can also be set as the startup image.When the engine <power> switch isturned to ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON <ON> mode, the initial screen(startup image) will be displayed.(→P.32)When “Screen Off” on the “Display”screen is selected, the screen is turnedoff and the desired screen off image thatis set is displayed. (To turn the screen off:→P.41)

No. Function Page

Select to copy images froma USB memory. 64

Select to delete images. 66

Select to set an image as thestartup or screen off image. 65

Page 65: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

65

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

4 Select the desired images from the listand then select “Copy”.

The selected image is displayed on theright side of the screen. If the selected

image file is broken or incompatible, will be displayed.The remaining number of image files that

can be transferred is displayed at the bot-tom of the screen.

5 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

■ SETTING THE STARTUP ANDSCREEN OFF IMAGES

1 Select “Set Images”.

With 8-inch display

2 Select the desired image.

With 12.3-inch display

2 Select the “Movies” or “Images” taband select the desired movie or image.

3 Select the desired items to be set.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of thedevice that is connected to the system,the armrest may not close fully. In thiscase, do not forcibly close the armrest asthis may damage the device or the termi-nal, etc.

INFORMATION

●When saving image files to a USB mem-ory to be transferred to the system, savethe images in a folder named “Image” (I-m-a-g-e, case sensitive). If a differentfolder name is used, the system will notrecognize the image files.

●The compatible file extensions are JPGand JPEG.

●An image’s file name, including file exten-sion, can be up to 32 characters.

●Image files of 10 MB or less can be trans-ferred.

●Up to 10 images can be transferred to thesystem.

●Files with non-ASCII filenames can notbe transferred.

No. Function

Select to set an image as the startupimage.

Select to set an image as the screenoff image.

Select to set an image as both thestartup and screen off image.

Page 66: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

66

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-ES

1 Select “Delete Images”.

2 Select the images to be deleted and se-lect “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(→P.61)

2 Select “Delete Personal Data”.

3 Select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

Registered or changed personal settingswill be deleted or returned to their defaultconditions.For example:• General settings• Navigation settings*• Audio settings• Phone settings• Lexus Enform settings*

DELETING PERSONAL DATA NOTICE

●With navigation system: Make sure themap microSD card is inserted whendeleting personal data. The personal datacannot be deleted when the mapmicroSD card is removed. To delete thedata, after inserting the map microSDcard, turn the engine <power> switch toACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>mode.

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 67: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

67

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

2. VOICE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Voice”.

4 Select the items to be set.

With 8-inch display

With 12.3-inch display

Voice guidance etc. can be set.

INFORMATION

●“Voice Settings” screen can also be dis-played from the voice recognition topscreen. (→P.231)

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN

Page 68: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

68

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No. Function

Select to adjust the volume of voiceguidance.

Select to set the voice guidanceduring route guidance on/off.

Select to set the voice guidanceduring audio/visual and/or air con-ditioning system use on/off.

Select to set the voice recognitionprompts on/off.

Select to train voice recognition.The voice command system adaptthe user accent.

Select to set the voice confirmationdisplay on/off.

Select to set the beep sound of navi-gation guidance.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 69: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

69

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select the items to be set.

*1: With 12.3-inch display*2: If equipped

Settings are available for maintenance,vehicle customization, intuitive parkingassist, etc.

No. Function Page

*1 Select to set mainte-nance. 70

Select to set vehiclecustomization.

“Owner’s Manual”

*2 Select to set intuitiveparking assist. 277

Select to set backcamera guide line. 254

*2 Select to set blindspot monitor.

“Owner’s Manual”

*2 Select to set drivingmode.

“Owner’s Manual”

Page 70: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

70

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Vehicle Settings” screen.(→P.69)

2 Select “Maintenance”.

3 Select the desired item.

MAINTENANCE*

When the system is turned on, the“Maintenance Reminder” screen dis-plays when it is time to replace a part orcertain components. (→P.32)

*: With 12.3-inch display

No. Function Page

Select to set the conditionof parts or components. 71

Select to add new informa-tion items separately fromprovided ones.

Select to cancel all condi-tions which have been en-tered.

Select to reset the itemswhich have expired condi-tions.

Select to call the registereddealer. ⎯

Select to register/edit deal-er information. 71

When set to on, the indica-tor will illuminate. The sys-tem is set to givemaintenance informationwith the “Maintenance Re-minder” screen.

32

INFORMATION

●When the vehicle needs to be serviced,the screen button color will change toorange.

Page 71: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

71

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

21 Select the desired part or component

screen button.

2 Set the conditions.

3 Select “OK” after entering the condi-tions.

1 Select “Set Dealer”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (→P.93)

The editing dealer screen appears aftersetting the location.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING

No. Function

Select to enter the next maintenancedate.

Select to enter the driving distanceuntil the next maintenance check.

Select to cancel the conditions whichhave been entered.

Select to reset the conditions whichhave expired.

INFORMATION

●For scheduled maintenance information,refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ScheduledMaintenance”.

●Depending on driving or road conditions,the actual date and distance that mainte-nance should be performed may differfrom the stored date and distance in thesystem.

DEALER SETTING

Dealer information can be registered inthe system. With dealer information reg-istered, route guidance to the dealer isavailable.

Page 72: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

72

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3 Select the items to be edited. ■ EDITING DEALER OR CONTACTNAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or“Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

■ EDITING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(→P.83) and select “OK”.

■ EDITING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

No. Function Page

Select to enter the name ofa dealer. 72

Select to enter the name ofa dealer member. 72

Select to set the location. 72

Select to enter the phonenumber. 72

Select to delete the dealerinformation displayed onthe screen.

Select to set the displayeddealer as a destination. 105

Page 73: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

73

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

Page 74: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

74

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................... 76

MAP SCREEN............................................................. 76

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN .............. 78

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ................ 79

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY...................... 79

MAP SCALE ............................................................... 80

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP............................ 81

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE........................ 82

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION..................... 82

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS........................................................ 83

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION......... 84

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION ........... 84

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET................................................................................. 87

STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................. 89

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION .................... 90

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP.................... 92

1. DESTINATION SEARCHOPERATION ........................................... 93

SELECTING SEARCH AREA............................ 95

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION............ 95

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION ...................................................... 95

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS............................... 96

SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST ...... 97

DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST ..................................... 101

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS.................................................... 101

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK............. 101

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY................... 102

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY ............................................................... 102

SEARCHING BY MAP......................................... 104

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES .............. 104

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ...... 105

CONFIRM DESTINATION SCREEN........... 106

ENTIRE ROUTE MAP SCREEN ...................... 106

1 BASIC OPERATION 2 DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NAVIGATION SYSTEM*

Page 75: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

3

75

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ........... 110

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE ............. 110

ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................... 112

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING........................ 113

WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION.................................................... 115

TURN LIST SCREEN............................................... 116

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN ............ 116

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS ................................................. 117

3. EDITING ROUTE...................................... 118

ADDING DESTINATIONS ................................. 118

REORDERING DESTINATIONS..................... 118

DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................. 119

SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES................. 119

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ................................ 119

DETOUR SETTING ................................................ 120

STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD........ 121

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS.......... 122

SETTING UP HOME ............................................. 123

SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS...... 124

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK ..................... 126

SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID .................. 129

DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS.................................................... 131

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................ 132

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................................ 132

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS ............................... 137

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS.............. 137

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .................................................. 139

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................................................... 139

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA................................. 142

MAP INFORMATION .......................................... 142

ABOUT THE MAP DATA ................................... 142

3 ROUTE GUIDANCE

4 MEMORY POINTS

5 SETUP

6 TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

NAVIGATION SYSTEM*

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 76: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

76

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

MAP SCREEN

To display the map screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.

No. Name Function Page

2D north up, 2Dheading up or 3Dheading up sym-bol

Indicates whether the map orientation is set tonorth-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside thissymbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction(e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-upview is available.

81

Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 80

“GPS” mark (Global Position-ing System)

Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals fromthe GPS. 139

Page 77: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

77

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

*: This function is not made available on some models.

* Traffic indicator

Shows that traffic information is received. Selectto start voice guidance for traffic information.When traffic information is received via HD Radiobroadcast, HD mark is displayed on the right.

90

Options button Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen. 78

Zoom in/out but-ton

Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. Wheneither button is selected, the map scale indicatorbar appears at the bottom of the screen.

80

Footprint mapbutton Select to display the footprint map screen. 80

Destination but-ton Select to display the “Destination” screen. 93

Speed limit icon Indicates the speed limit on the current road. Thedisplay of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off. 84

Route informa-tion bar

Displays the current street name, or the distancewith the estimated travel time/arrival time to thedestination. The route information bar fills fromleft to right as the vehicle progresses on the route. 111

Route informa-tion button

Select to change the display between the currentstreet name and the distance with the estimatedtravel/arrival time.

Screen changebutton

Select to change the map screen to full screen dis-play. ⎯

INFORMATION

●Certain screen buttons on the map screen will disappear several seconds after the RemoteTouch has been operated. This setting can be changed so that all the screen buttons willalways be displayed.(→P.132)

●Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch to display the address of the current positionon the map screen or repeat voice guidance.

No. Name Function Page

Page 78: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

78

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN

The navigation options screen can be reached by the following methods:

Select on the map screen. (→P.76)

No. Function Page

Select to change the map configuration. 82

Select to change the displayed map information such as POI icons,route trace, speed limit, etc. 84

Select to display the map version and coverage area. 142

Select to edit the set route. 118

Select to pause or resume route guidance. ⎯

Select to display the overview of the entire route. 112

Page 79: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

79

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION

1 Press the “MAP” button on the RemoteTouch.

2 Check that the current position map isdisplayed.

Selecting will change the mapscreen to full screen display.

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

To correct the current position manu-ally:→P.135

INFORMATION

●While driving, the current position markis fixed on the screen and the map moves.

●The current position is automatically setas the vehicle receives signals from theGPS (Global Positioning System). If thecurrent position is not correct, it is auto-matically corrected after the vehiclereceives signals from the GPS.

●After the 12-volt battery disconnection,or on a new vehicle, the current positionmay not be correct. As soon as the sys-tem receives signals from the GPS, thecorrect current position is displayed.

Page 80: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

80

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select or to change thescale of the map screen.

The scale indicator bar appears at the bot-tom of the screen.

Select and hold or to continuechanging the scale of the map screen.The scale of the map screen can also be

changed by selecting the scale bar directly.This function is not available while driving.

1 Select on the map screen.

2 Check that the footprint map is dis-played.

To return to the normal map display, select

.

MAP SCALE

INFORMATION

●Press the “ ” button on the RemoteTouch to zoom in on the map screen andthe “ ” button to zoom out.

●In areas where the footprint map is avail-

able the map scale changes from

to when at the minimum range.

FOOTPRINT MAP

For areas covered by the footprint map(some major cities), a footprint map on ascale of 75 ft. (25 m) can be selected.When the map is scaled down to 150 ft.

(50 m), changes to and canbe selected to display the footprint map.

INFORMATION

●If the map or the current position ismoved to the area which is not coveredby the footprint map, the screen scaleautomatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).

●On the footprint map, a one way street is

displayed by .●Scrolling on the footprint map is not avail-

able while driving.

Building footprints in the database werecreated and provided by HERE.

Page 81: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

81

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3To display the normal map, select .

1 Select an arrow to rotate.

: North-up symbolRegardless of the direction of vehicle travel,north is always up.

: Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.

: 3D Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate the

vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N fornorth).

3D CITY MODEL MAP

A 3D city model map can be displayedfor some areas in major cities when themap scale is 700 ft. (200 m) or less onthe 3D map screen.

INFORMATION

●The 3D city model map can be set thedisplay on/off. (→P.132)

ROTATING 3D MAP

3D map and 3D city model map can berotated when arrows appear around thecursor while scrolling.

INFORMATION

●The viewing angle of the 3D map can bechanged. (→P.135)

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

The orientation of the map can bechanged between 2D north-up, 2Dheading-up and 3D heading-up by se-lecting the orientation symbol displayedat the top left of the screen.

Page 82: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

82

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select on the map screen. (→P.78)

2 Select “Map Mode”.

3 Select the desired configuration button.

Depending on the conditions, certainscreen configuration buttons cannot beselected.

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE

No. Function Page

Select to display the singlemap screen. ⎯

Select to display the turn listscreen. 116

Select to display the free-way exit list screen. 113

Select to display the inter-section guidance screen orthe guidance screen on thefreeway.

115

Select to display the turn-by-turn arrow screen. 116

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION

Use the scroll feature to move the de-sired point to the center of the screen forlooking at a point on the map that is dif-ferent from the current position.

No. Information/Function

Cursor mark

Distance from the current position tothe cursor mark

Select to register as a memory point.To change the icon, name, etc.: →P.126

Select to set as a destination.When selecting “Go to ” on thefollowing map screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for theroute. (→P.105)If a destination has already been set,“Go to ” and “Add to Route” willbe displayed.“Go to ”: Select to delete the exist-ing destination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Select to add a des-tination.

Page 83: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

83

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

To scroll over the map screen, place thecursor mark in the desired position andthen press and hold the Remote Touchknob. The map will continue scrolling in thatdirection until the knob is released.Press the “MAP” button on the Remote

Touch to return to the current position.

1 Select one of the 8 directional arrows tomove the cursor to the desired pointand then select “OK”.

The cursor can also be moved by brieflyselecting a desired point on the map.

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS

The cursor location can be adjusted insmall increments when “Adjust Loca-tion” is selected on the setting mapscreen. Also, when changing the location ofmemory points on the editing screen(→P.128) and adjusting the current po-sition mark manually on the “Calibration”screen (→P.135), 8 directional arrowsmay appear for this purpose.

Page 84: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

84

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION

1 Select on the map screen. (→P.78)

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select the desired items to be displayed.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(→P.84)

2 Select “Select POI”.When the POI icons to be displayed on the

map screen have already been set,“Change POI” is displayed.

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION

Information such as POI icons, routetrace, speed limit, etc. can be displayedon the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display the select-ed POI icons. ⎯

Select to select or changePOI icons. 84

Select to display routetrace. 86

Select to display traffic in-formation. 90

* Select to display speed limiticon. ⎯

*: This function is not made available onsome models.

SELECTING THE POI ICONS

No. Function Page

Page 85: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

85

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

3 Select the desired POI category and se-lect “OK”.

■ SELECTING OTHER POI ICONSTO BE DISPLAYED

1 Select “Other POIs”.

2 Select the desired POI categories andselect “OK”.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories. To add more POI catego-ries, select “More”.

No. Information/Function Page

Displays up to 5 selectedPOI icons on the mapscreen.

Select to cancel the select-ed POI icons. −

Displays up to 6 POI iconsas favorite POI categories 134

Select to display other POIcategories if the desiredPOIs cannot be found onthe screen.

85

Select to search for thenearest POIs. 86

Page 86: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

86

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POILIST

1 Select “Find Local POI”.

2 Select the desired POI.“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near thecurrent position or along the route.

3 Check that the selected POI is dis-played on the map screen.

When “Near...” is selected

1 Select the desired item.

■ START RECORDING THE ROUTETRACE

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(→P.84)

2 Select “Route Trace”.The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates and

the route trace starts.

3 Check that the traveled line is displayed.

POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) ofthe current position will be listed fromamong the selected categories.

No. Function

Select to search for POIs near thecurrent position.

Select to search for POIs along theroute.

ROUTE TRACE

The traveled route can be stored and re-traced on the map screen. This feature isavailable when the map scale is 30 miles(50 km) or less.

Page 87: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

87

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

■ STOP RECORDING THE ROUTETRACE

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(→P.84)

2 Select “Route Trace” again.

3 A confirmation screen will be displayed. “Yes”: Select to keep the recordedroute trace.“No”: Select to erase the recordedroute trace.

1 Place the cursor over an icon.

2 Select “Info”.INFORMATION

●The traveled route can be stored up to124 miles (200 km).

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET

When the cursor is placed over an iconon the map screen, the name bar is dis-played on the upper part of the screen. If“Info” appears on the right side of thename bar, detailed information can bedisplayed.

Page 88: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

88

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

“Mark”: Select to register as a memorypoint. To change the icon, name, etc.:→P.126“Enter ”: Select to set as a destination.

: Select to call the registerednumber.“Delete”: Select to delete destination ormemory point.“Edit”: Select to display the edit memorypoint screen.“Detail”: Select to display detailed informa-tion.*

INFORMATION

●Even when traffic information is not cur-rently being received, traffic informationand “Info” will be displayed for a whileafter traffic information has beenreceived.

●In some situations, calls to a POI mayautomatically change to an internationalcall or may not be possible as a domesticcall.

*: This function is not made available on some models.

Page 89: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

89

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

STANDARD MAP ICONS

Icon Name

Island

Park

Industry

Business facility

Airport

Military

University

Hospital

Stadium

Shopping mall

Golf

Page 90: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

90

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION*

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Traffic Incidents”.

4 Select the desired item.“Traffic Event List”: Select to display a list ofcurrent traffic information. (→P.91)“Predictive Traffic Map”: Select to display amap with predictive traffic data. (→P.91)

Traffic data can be received via HD Ra-dio broadcast or LEXUS App Suite todisplay traffic information on the mapscreen.

INFORMATION

●If a large amount of information is beingreceived, it may take longer than normalfor the information to be displayed on thescreen.

*: This function is not made available on some models.

Page 91: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

91

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (→P.90)

2 Select “Traffic Event List”.

3 Select the desired traffic information.“On Current Road”: Select to display trafficinformation for the current road.“On Current Route”: Select to display traf-fic information for the set route.When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic in-formation.

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (→P.90)

2 Select “Predictive Traffic Map”.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point andset the time of predictive traffic informa-tion.

The time of the predictive traffic informa-tion can be displayed in 15-minute steps upto +45 minutes.

“+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes.“-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION

A list of current traffic information canbe displayed along with information onthe location and the distance of the inci-dent.

DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE TRAFFIC MAP

A map with predictive traffic data can bedisplayed.

Page 92: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

92

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select on the map screen. (→P.78)

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select “Traffic Information”.When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

: The icons show traffic incident, roadrepair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select to dis-play traffic information and start voice guid-ance for the traffic information.

: The color of the arrow changes de-pending on the traffic information received.The indicator is displayed as follows.

: Traffic information has beenreceived.

: Traffic information has beenreceived via HD Radio broadcast.No icon: Traffic information has not been

received.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP

Page 93: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

93

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

1. DESTINATION SEARCH OPERATION

The “Destination” screen can be reached by the following methods:From the map screen

Select “Dest.” on the map screen. (→P.76)From the “Menu” screen

Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. (→P.14)

No. Function Page

Select to search for a destination by address. 96

Select to search for a destination by point of interest. 97

* Select to search for a destination by online database. 337

* Select to search for a destination via the Lexus response center. 339

Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations. 101

Page 94: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

94

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

*: This function is not made available on some models.

Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “AddressBook”. 101

Select to search for a destination from emergency service points. 102

Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/exit. 102

Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map. 104

Select to search for a destination by coordinates. 104

Select to set a destination by home. 95

Select to set a destination from preset destinations. 95

Select to delete set destinations. 119

No. Function Page

Page 95: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

95

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select “Select State/Province” or“Change State/Province”.

If a state (province) has not been selectedyet, “Select State/Province” is displayed.

4 Select the desired state (province).To change countries, select the “United

States”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.For map database information and updates:

→P.105

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Go Home”.The navigation system performs a search

for the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (→P.105)

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select any of the preset destination but-tons (1-5).

The navigation system performs a searchfor the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (→P.105)

SELECTING SEARCH AREA

The selected state (province) can bechanged to set a destination from adifferent state (province) by using“Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION

To use this function, it is necessary toregister a home address. (→P.123)

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION

To use this function, it is necessary toregister preset destinations to the presetscreen buttons (1-5). (→P.124)

Page 96: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

96

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Address”.

3 Select the desired search method.

1 Select “City”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name fromthe list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Enter a street name and select “OK”.

5 Select the desired street name.

6 Enter a house number and select “OK”. If the same address exists, the address list

screen will be displayed. Select the desiredaddress.

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS

There are 2 methods to search for a des-tination by address.

No. Function Page

Select to search by city. 96

Select to search by streetaddress. 97

SEARCHING BY CITY

Page 97: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

97

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Street Address”.

2 Enter a house number and select “OK”.

3 Enter a street name and select “OK”.

4 Select the desired street name.

5 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

6 Select the desired city name. If the same address exists, the address list

screen will be displayed. Select the desiredaddress.

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Point of Interest”.

3 Select the desired search method.

SEARCHING BY STREET ADDRESS

INFORMATION

●A street name can be searched usingonly the body part of its name.For example: S WESTERN AVE• A search can be performed by entering

“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”or “WESTERN”.

SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST

There are 4 methods to search for a des-tination by Points of Interest.

No. Function Page

Select to search by name. 98

Select to search by catego-ry. 99

Select to search by phonenumber. 100

Page 98: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

98

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Name”.

2 Enter a POI name and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired POI.

When entering the name of a specific POI,and there are 2 or more sites with the samename, the list screen will be displayed.Select the desired POI.

■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

1 Select “City”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.“Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Select the desired POI.

■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-RIES

1 Select “Category”.

2 Select the desired category. If there is more than 1 detailed item of the

selected category, the detailed list will bedisplayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.

3 Select the desired POI.

SEARCHING BY NAME

No. Function Page

Select to search for POI inthe desired city. 98

Select to search for POIfrom the category list. 98

Select to search for POI us-ing online database. 99

INFORMATION

●To search for a facility name using multi-ple search words, put a space betweeneach word.

Page 99: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

99

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

■ SEARCHING FOR POI USINGWEB SEARCH*

1 Select “” next to “Web Search” to se-lect a search engine.

2 Select the desired search engine icon.The selected search engine icon will be dis-

played on the top center of the POI listscreen.

3 Select the search engine icon.

1 Select “Category”.

2 Select the desired search point.

Accessing to a search engineFor the procedure on how to conduct asearch via a search engine, go to “SET-TING A DESTINATION USINGLEXUS App Suite” (→P.337), and followthe steps from 3 onward.

*: This function is not made available on some models.

SEARCHING BY CATEGORY

No. Function

Select to set the search point fromnear the current position.

Select to search for POIs along theset route.

Select to set the search point fromnear a city center. (→P.100)

Select to set the search point fromnear a destination. When more than1 destination has been set, a list willbe displayed on the screen. Selectthe item to be set.

Page 100: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

100

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3 Select the desired POI category. If there is more than 1 detailed item of the

selected category, the detailed list will bedisplayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.“Favorite POI Categories”: Select to usethe 6 POIs that have been previouslyset.(→P.134)

4 Select the desired POI.“Web Search”: Select to search for POI us-ing online database. (→P.99)

When “Near a City Center in XX*” is se-lected

1 Select “Near a City Center in XX”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name fromthe list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Select “OK” when the city center mapscreen is displayed.

5 Follow the steps from 3 onward in“SEARCHING BY CATEGORY”.(→P.99)

*:XX represents the selected search areaname.

1 Select “Phone #”.

2 Enter a phone number and select “OK”. If there is more than 1 site with the same

number, the list screen will be displayed.

INFORMATION

●The names of POIs located withinapproximately 200 miles (320 km) fromthe selected search point can be dis-played. INFORMATION

●If the navigation system has never beenused, selecting the city name from “Last 5Cities” will not be available.

SEARCHING BY PHONE NUMBER

INFORMATION

●If there is no match for the entered phonenumber, a list of identical numbers withdifferent area codes will be displayed.

Page 101: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

101

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Previous Destinations”.

3 Select the desired destination.“Previous Start Point”: Select to display thestart point map of the previous guidedroute.“Delete”: Select to delete the previous des-tination. (→P.131)

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Address Book”.

3 Select the desired address book entry.“Options”: Select to register or edit addressbook entries. (→P.127)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST*

The destination can be searched by call-ing an operator of Destination Assist.You can request either a specific busi-ness, address, or ask for help locatingyour desired destination. (→P.339)

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

INFORMATION

●The previous start point and up to 100previously set destinations are displayedon the screen.

*: This function is not made available on some models.

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK

To use this function, it is necessary toregister an address book entry. (→P.126)

Page 102: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

102

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Emergency”.

3 Select the desired emergency category.

4 Select the desired destination.

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select the desired method.

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY

INFORMATION

●The navigation system does not guide inareas where route guidance is unavail-able. (→P.140)

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY

There are 2 methods to search for a des-tination by Intersection & Freeway.

No. Function Page

Select to search by inter-section. 103

Select to search by freewayentrance/exit. 103

Page 103: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

103

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Intersection”.

2 Enter the name of the first intersectingstreet which is located near the destina-tion and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired street name.

4 Enter the name of the second intersect-ing street and select “OK”.

5 Select the desired street name. If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 inter-

section in a city, the list of intersections willbe displayed.

1 Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”.

2 Enter a freeway name and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired freeway.

4 Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.

5 Enter a freeway entrance or exit nameand select “OK”.

6 Select the desired entrance or exitname.

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION

SEARCHING BY FREEWAY ENTRANCE/EXIT

INFORMATION

●Be sure to use the complete name of thefreeway or highway, including the hyphen,when entering the destination. Freewaysand interstates use an “I” (I-405). UShighways use the state designation beforethe number (CA-118).

Page 104: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

104

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Map”.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point andselect “Go to ”.

“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the posi-tion in smaller increments. (→P.83) If a destination has already been set, “Go to

” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing des-tination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.The navigation system performs a search

for the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (→P.105)

1 Display the “Destination” screen. (→P.93)

2 Select “Coordinates”.

3 Enter the latitude and longitude and se-lect “OK”.

SEARCHING BY MAP

By selecting “Map” the last displayed lo-cation is displayed again on the mapscreen. You can search for a destinationfrom this map.

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES

Page 105: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

105

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

1 Select “Go” on the confirm destinationscreen.

For details about this screen: →P.106

2 Select “OK” on the entire route mapscreen.

For details about this screen: →P.106

When the destination is set, the confirmdestination screen will be displayed.

WARNING

●Be sure to obey traffic regulations andkeep road conditions in mind while driv-ing. If a traffic sign on the road has beenchanged, the route guidance may notindicate such changed information.

INFORMATION

●The route for returning may not be thesame as that for going.

●The route guidance to the destinationmay not be the shortest route or a routewithout traffic congestion.

●Route guidance may not be available ifthere is no road data for the specifiedlocation.

●When setting the destination on a mapwith a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m),the map scale changes to 0.5 mile (800m) automatically. If this occurs, set thedestination again.

●If a destination that is not located on aroad is set, the vehicle will be guided tothe point on a road nearest to the destina-tion. The road nearest to the selectedpoint is set as the destination.

Page 106: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

106

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

CONFIRM DESTINATION SCREEN

No. Function

Select to adjust the position in small-er increments. (→P.83)

Select to register as a memory point.

Select to search for the route. (→P.105)If a destination has already been set,“Go Directly” and “Add to Route”will be displayed.“Go Directly”: Select to delete theexisting destination(s) and set a newone.“Add to Route”: Select to add a des-tination.

Select to call the registered number.

ENTIRE ROUTE MAP SCREEN

No. Information/Function

Select the desired route from 3 pos-sible routes. (→P.107)

Select to change the route. (→P.109)

Select to display a list of the turns re-quired to reach the destination.(→P.108)

Current position

Destination point

Type of route and its distance

Distance of the entire route

• Select to start guidance.• Select and hold to start demo

mode. (→P.107)

Page 107: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

107

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Select and hold “OK” on the entire

route map screen until a beep sounds.During demo mode, “Demo” is displayed

on the map screen.Press the “MAP” button on the Remote

Touch to end demo mode.

1 Select “Three Routes”.

2 Select the desired route.

STARTING DEMO MODE

Before starting the route guidance, thedemonstration of the route guidancecan be viewed.

3 ROUTES SELECTION

No. Function

Select to display the quickest route.

Select to display the alternativeroute.

Select to display the route that is theshortest distance to the set destina-tion.

Select to display the informationabout the 3 routes. (→P.108)

Page 108: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

108

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFOR-MATION

1 Select “Info”.

2 Check that the “Information for ThreeRoutes” screen is displayed.

1 Select “Turn List”.

2 Check that the turn list is displayed.

No. Information

Time necessary for the entire trip

Distance of the entire trip

Distance of the toll road

Distance of the freeway

Distance of the ferry trip

DISPLAYING TURN LIST

A list of turn information from the cur-rent position to the destination can bedisplayed.

No. Information

Current position

Distance to the next turn

Turn direction at the intersection

Select to display the map of the se-lected point.

INFORMATION

●However, not all road names on the routemay appear on the list. If a road changesits name without requiring a turn (such ason a street that runs through 2 or morecities), the name change will not appearon the list. The street names will be dis-played in order from the starting point,along with the distance to the next turn.

Page 109: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

109

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Select “Edit Route”.

2 Select the desired item.

EDITING ROUTE

Destinations can be added, reorderedor deleted, and conditions for the routeto the destination can be changed.

No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 118

Select to delete destina-tions. 119

Select to reorder destina-tions. 118

Select to set route prefer-ences. 119

Select to change routetype. 119

INFORMATION

●Even if the “Freeways” indicator isdimmed, the route cannot avoid includinga freeway in some cases. (→P.119)

●If the calculated route includes a trip byferry, the route guidance shows a searoute. After traveling by ferry, the currentposition may be incorrect. Upon recep-tion of GPS signals, it is automaticallycorrected.

Page 110: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

110

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN

During the route guidance, varioustypes of guidance screens can be dis-played depending on conditions.

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE

No. Information

Distance to the next turn and an ar-row indicating the turning direction

Guidance route

Current position

Current street name or route infor-mation

INFORMATION

●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,the route is searched again.

●For some areas, the roads have not beencompletely digitized in our database. Forthis reason, the route guidance mayselect a road that should not be traveledon.

●When arriving at the set destination thedestination name will be displayed on theupper part of the screen.

●When the head-up display is set to on,turn-by-turn guidance arrows will be dis-played on the windshield.

Page 111: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

111

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select the route information bar ( ) orthe route information button ( ) tochange the display of the route informa-tion bar.

CHANGING ROUTE INFORMATION BAR

When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the route information bar displaysthe current street name or the distancewith the estimated travel/arrival time tothe destination.

No. Information

Select to change the display be-tween the estimated travel time andthe estimated arrival time.“Arrival Time”: Select to display theestimated arrival time.“Time to Dest.”: Select to display theestimated travel time.

Select to change the display be-tween the current street name andthe distance with the estimated trav-el/arrival time.

INFORMATION

●When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance measured along theroute is displayed. Travel time and arrivaltime are calculated based on the averagespeed for the specified speed limit.

●When the vehicle gets off the guidanceroute, the arrow facing the destination isdisplayed instead of the estimated travel/arrival time.

●The route information bar fills from left toright as the vehicle progresses on theroute.

Page 112: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

112

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select the route information bar.

2 Check that the list of the distance andtime is displayed.

By selecting one of the number buttons, thedesired route information is displayed.

1 Select on the map screen. (→P.78)

2 Select “Route Overview”.

3 Check that the entire route map is dis-played.

For details about this screen: →P.105

DISTANCE AND TRAVEL/ARRIVAL TIME

When driving on the guidance routewith more than 1 destination set, a list ofthe distance with estimated travel/arriv-al time from the current position to eachdestination is displayed.

ROUTE OVERVIEW

The entire route from the current posi-tion to the destination can be displayedduring the route guidance.

Page 113: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

113

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING

During freeway driving, the freeway in-formation screen will be displayed.

No./Icon Information/Function

Distance and time from the currentposition to the freeway exit/rest ar-ea.

Name of the freeway exit/rest area.

POIs that are close to a freeway exit

Select to display the selected map ofthe exit vicinity.

Select to display the nearest freewayexits/rest areas from the current po-sition.

Select to scroll to farther freeway ex-its/rest areas.

Select to scroll to freeway exits/restareas.

INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screendisplay, the freeway information screenwill be displayed on the side display.

Page 114: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

114

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

WHEN APPROACHING FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION

When the vehicle approaches an exit orjunction, the freeway guidance screenwill be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next exit or junction name

Distance from the current position tothe exit or junction

Select to hide the freeway guidancescreen.To return to the freeway guidancescreen, press the “MAP” button onthe Remote Touch.

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

TOLLGATE GUIDANCE

When the vehicle approaches a tollgate,the tollgate view will be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Distance from the current position tothe tollgate

Select to hide the tollgate guidancescreen.To return to the tollgate guidancescreen, press the “MAP” button onthe Remote Touch.

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

Page 115: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

115

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

REAL FREEWAY JUNCTION VIEW

When the vehicle approaches a junc-tion, the junction view with signage willbe displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next junction or street name

Select to hide the real freeway junc-tion view.To return to the real freeway junctionview, press the “MAP” button on theRemote Touch.

Distance from the current position tothe next junction

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION

When the vehicle approaches an inter-section, the intersection guidancescreen will be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next street name

Select to hide the intersection guid-ance screen.To return to the intersection guid-ance screen, press the “MAP” but-ton on the Remote Touch.

Distance to the intersection

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screendisplay, the intersection guidance screenwill be displayed on the side display.

Page 116: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

116

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode”screen. (→P.82)

2 Check that the turn list screen is dis-played.

1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the“Map Mode” screen. (→P.82)

2 Check that the turn-by-turn arrowscreen is displayed.

TURN LIST SCREEN

No. Information

Turn direction

Distance between turns

Next street or destination name

INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screendisplay, the turn list screen will be dis-played on the side display.

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN

On this screen, information about thenext turn on the guidance route can bedisplayed.

No. Information

Exit number or street name

Turn direction

Distance to the next turn

INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screendisplay, the turn-by-turn arrow screen willbe displayed on the side display.

Page 117: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

117

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS

As the vehicle approaches an intersec-tion, or point, where maneuvering thevehicle is necessary, the system’s voiceguidance will provide various messages.

WARNING

●Be sure to obey the traffic regulations andkeep the road condition in mind espe-cially when you are driving on IPD roads(roads that are not completely digitized inour database). The route guidance maynot have the updated information such asthe direction of a one way street.

INFORMATION

●If a voice guidance command cannot beheard, press the “MAP” on the RemoteTouch.

●To adjust the voice guidance volume: →P.67

●Voice guidance may be made early orlate.

●If the system cannot determine the cur-rent position correctly, you may not hearvoice guidance or may not see the mag-nified intersection on the screen.

Page 118: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

118

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. EDITING ROUTE

1 Select on the map screen. (→P.78)

2 Select “Edit Route”.

3 Select the item to be set.

4 Check that the entire route map is dis-played. (→P.106)

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Add”.

3 Search for an additional destination inthe same way as a destination search.(→P.93)

4 Select “Add Destination Here” to insertthe new destination into the route.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired destination and se-lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” tochange the arrival order. Then select“OK”.

No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 118

Select to delete destina-tions. 119

Select to reorder destina-tions. 118

Select to set route prefer-ences. 119

Select to change routetype. 119

Select to set detours. 120

Select to start from adja-cent road. 121

ADDING DESTINATIONS

REORDERING DESTINATIONS

When more than 1 destination has beenset, the arrival order of the destinationscan be changed.

Page 119: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

119

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

When more than 1 destination has been set,a list will be displayed on the screen. Selectthe item(s) to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Select to delete all destina-tions on the list. If more than 1 destination has been set, the

system will recalculate the route(s) to theset destination(s) as necessary.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Preferences”.

3 Select the desired route preferencesand select “OK”.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Route Type”.

3 Select the desired route type and select“OK”.

During driving, the route guidance startsafter selecting the desired route type.

4 The entire route from the starting pointto the destination is displayed.

For details about this screen: →P.105

DELETING DESTINATIONS SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES

The conditions to determine the routecan be selected from various choicessuch as freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc.

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE

Page 120: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

120

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Detour”.

3 Select the desired detour distance.

DETOUR SETTING

During the route guidance, the routecan be changed to detour around a sec-tion of the route where a delay is causedby road repairs, an accident, etc.

No. Function

Select to detour within 1 mile of thecurrent position.

Select to detour within 3 miles of thecurrent position.

Select to detour within 5 miles of thecurrent position.

Select to detour on the entire route.

*

Select to make the system search forthe route based on traffic congestioninformation received from traffic in-formation. (→P.90)

*: This function is not made available onsome models.

INFORMATION

●This picture shows an example of how thesystem would guide around a delaycaused by a traffic jam.

This position indicates the location of atraffic jam caused by road repairs, an ac-cident, etc.

This route indicates the detour suggest-ed by the system.

●When the vehicle is on a freeway, thedetour distance selections are 5, 15 and25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units arein km).

●The system may not be able to calculate adetour route depending on the selecteddistance and surrounding road condi-tions.

Page 121: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

121

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Route” screen. (→P.118)

2 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.

STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD

When a freeway and a surface road runin parallel, the system may show theguidance route going on the freewaywhile driving on the surface road, or viceversa. If this happens, you can instantly choosethe adjacent road for the route guid-ance.

INFORMATION

●When there is no adjacent road, thisscreen button will not be displayed.

Page 122: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

122

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

4. MEMORY POINTS

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Navigation”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.Home, preset destinations, addressbook entries, areas to avoid can be setas memory points. The registered pointscan be used as the destinations. (→P.93)Registered areas to avoid, will be avoid-ed when the system searches for a route.

No. Function Page

Select to set home. 123

Select to set preset destina-tions. 124

Select to set the addressbook. 126

Select to set areas to avoid. 129

Select to delete previousdestinations. 131

Select to set detailed navi-gation settings. 132

Page 123: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

123

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Display the “Navigation Settings”

screen. (→P.122)

2 Select “Home”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 Select “Set Home Location”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (→P.93)

3 Select “OK” when the editing homescreen appears.

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired item to be edited.

3 Select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

SETTING UP HOME

If home has been registered, that infor-mation can be recalled by selecting “GoHome” on the “Destination” screen.(→P.95)

No. Function Page

Select to register home. 123

Select to edit home. 123

Select to delete home. 123

REGISTERING HOME

EDITING HOME

No. Function Page

Select to edit the homename. 128

Select to set display of thehome name on/off. ⎯

Select to edit location infor-mation. 128

Select to edit the phonenumber. 128

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

127

DELETING HOME

Page 124: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

124

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (→P.122)

2 Select “Preset Destinations”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “Set”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (→P.93)

3 Select a position for this preset destina-tion.

4 Select “OK” when the editing presetdestination screen appears. (→P.125)

SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS

If a preset destination has been regis-tered, that information can be recalledby using preset destinations on the“Destination” screen. (→P.95)

No. Function Page

Select to register a presetdestination. 124

Select to edit a preset desti-nation. 125

Select to delete a presetdestination. 125

REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS

INFORMATION

●Up to 5 preset destinations can be regis-tered.

Page 125: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

125

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired preset destination.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the preset destination to be de-leted and select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS

No. Function Page

Select to edit the presetdestination name. 128

Select to set display of thepreset destination nameon/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 128

Select to edit the phonenumber. 128

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

127

DELETING PRESET DESTINATIONS

Page 126: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

126

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (→P.122)

2 Select “Address Book”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (→P.93)

3 Select “OK” when the editing addressbook entry screen appears. (→P.127)

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK

Points on the map can be registered.

No. Function Page

Select to register addressbook entries. 126

Select to edit address bookentries. 127

Select to delete addressbook entries. 128

REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

INFORMATION

●Up to 100 address book entries can beregistered.

Page 127: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

127

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired address book entry.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE ICON

1 Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”.

2 Select the desired icon.

Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

“With Sound”: Select the memory pointswith a sound

When the “With Sound” tab is selected

1 Select the “With Sound” tab.

2 Select the desired sound icon.

: Select to play the sound.When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,

select an arrow to adjust the direction andselect “OK”.

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

The icon, name, location and/or phonenumber of a registered address bookentry can be edited.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the addressbook entry name. 128

Select to set display of theaddress book entry nameon/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 128

Select to edit the phonenumber. 128

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

127

A sound for some address book entriescan be set. When the vehicle approach-es the location of the address book en-try, the selected sound will be heard.

INFORMATION

●The bell sounds only when the vehicleapproaches this point in the direction thathas been set.

Page 128: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

128

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(→P.83) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the item to be deleted and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

Page 129: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

129

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (→P.122)

2 Select “Areas to Avoid”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (→P.93)

3 Select either or tochange the size of the area to be avoid-ed and select “OK”.

4 Select “OK” when the editing area toavoid screen appears.

SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID

Areas to be avoided because of trafficjams, construction work or other rea-sons can be registered as “Areas toAvoid”.

No. Function Page

Select to register areas toavoid. 129

Select to edit areas toavoid. 130

Select to delete areas toavoid. 130

REGISTERING AREAS TO AVOID

INFORMATION

●If a destination is entered in the area toavoid or the route calculation cannot bemade without running through the area toavoid, a route passing through the area tobe avoided may be shown.

●Up to 10 locations can be registered aspoints/areas to avoid.

Page 130: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

130

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the area and select “OK”.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(→P.83) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE AREA SIZE

1 Select “Edit” next to “Size”.

2 Select either or tochange the size of the area to be avoid-ed and select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the area to be deleted and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

EDITING AREAS TO AVOID

The name, location and/or area size of aregistered area can be edited.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the name ofthe area to avoid. 130

Select to set display of thearea to avoid name on/off. ⎯

Select to edit area location. 130

Select to edit area size. 130

Select to set the area toavoid function on/off. ⎯

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID

Page 131: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

131

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Display the “Navigation Settings”

screen. (→P.122)

2 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.

3 Select the previous destination to be de-leted and select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Previous destinations can be deleted.

Page 132: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

132

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

5. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Navigation”.

4 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.

5 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for pop-up infor-mation, favorite POI categories, low fuelwarning, etc.

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS

Page 133: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

133

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

No. Function Page

Select to set the automaticscreen button hiding func-tion on/off. When set to on,certain screen buttons onthe map screen will disap-pear several seconds afterthe Remote Touch hasbeen operated. When setto off, all the screen buttonswill always be displayed.

Select to set display of pop-up information on/off. ⎯

Select to set favorite POIcategories that are used forPOI selection to display onthe map screen.

134

Select to set display of lowfuel warning on/off. 134

Select to set IPD road guid-ance on/off. ⎯

Select to set the voice guid-ance for the next streetname on/off.

Select to set display of the3D city model map on/off. ⎯

Select to change the view-ing angle of the 3D map. 135

Select to adjust the currentposition mark manually orto adjust miscalculation ofthe distance caused by tirereplacement.

135

Select to reset all setupitems. ⎯

No. Function Page

Page 134: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

134

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (→P.132)

2 Select “Favorite POI Categories”.

3 Select the category to be changed.

“Default”: Select to set the default catego-ries.

4 Select the desired POI category.“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.

5 Select the desired POI icon.

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (→P.132)

2 Select “Low Fuel Warning”.

3 Select “On” or “Off”.

■ SEARCHING GAS STATION INLOW FUEL WARNING

1 Select “Yes” when the low fuel warningappears.

2 Select the desired nearby gas station.

3 Select “Enter ” to set as a destination.“Info”: Select to display gas station informa-tion. (→P.87)

FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES (SELECT POI ICONS)

Up to 6 POI icons, which are used forselecting POIs on the map screen, canbe selected as favorites.

LOW FUEL WARNING

When the fuel level is low, a warningmessage will pop up on the screen.

A nearby gas station can be selected asa destination.

Page 135: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

135

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (→P.132)

2 Select “3D Map Viewing Angle”.

3 Select “Up” or “Down” to change theviewing angle.

“Default”: Select to set the initial angle.

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (→P.132)

2 Select “Calibration”.

3 Select the desired item.

■ POSITION/DIRECTION CALI-BRATION

1 Select “Position / Direction”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(→P.83) and select “OK”.

3 Select an arrow to adjust the direction ofthe current position mark and select“OK”.

CHANGING VIEWING ANGLE OF 3D MAP

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

The current position mark can be adjust-ed manually. Miscalculation of the dis-tance caused by tire replacement canalso be adjusted.

For additional information on the accu-racy of a current position: →P.139

When driving, the current position markwill be automatically corrected by GPSsignals. If GPS reception is poor due tolocation, the current position mark canbe adjusted manually.

Page 136: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

136

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

1 Select “Tire Change”.The message appears and the quick dis-

tance calibration starts automatically.

The tire change calibration function willbe used when replacing the tires. Thisfunction will adjust miscalculationcaused by the circumference differencebetween the old and new tires.

INFORMATION

●If this procedure is not performed whenthe tires are replaced, the current posi-tion mark may be incorrectly displayed.

Page 137: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

137

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS*

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Traffic”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Traffic information such as traffic con-gestion or traffic incident warnings canbe made available.

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS

No. Function

Select to set the avoid traffic functionauto/manual. (→P.138)

Select to set the usage of traffic infor-mation for the estimated arrival timeon/off.

Select to set the display of an arrowof free flowing traffic on/off.

Select to set to on/off whether toconsider the predictive traffic infor-mation (→P.91) with estimated ar-rival time and detoured route search.

Select to set traffic incident voicewarning on/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

*: This function is not made available on some models.

Page 138: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

138

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.(→P.137)

2 Select “Avoid Traffic”.

3 Select the desired item.

■ CHANGING THE ROUTE MANU-ALLY

1 Select the desired item.

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC

No. Function

Select to automatically changeroutes when congestion informationof the guidance route has been re-ceived.

Select to select manually whether ornot to change routes when conges-tion information of the guidanceroute has been received. In thismode, a screen will appear to ask ifyou wish to reroute.

Select to not reroute when conges-tion information for the guidanceroute has been received.

When the navigation system calculatesa new route, the following screen will bedisplayed.

No. Function

Select to start route guidance usingthe new route.

Select to confirm the new route andcurrent route on the map.

Select to continue the current routeguidance.

Page 139: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

139

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-ment of Defense provides an accuratecurrent position, normally using 4 or moresatellites, and in some case 3 satellites. TheGPS system has a certain level of inaccura-cy. While the navigation system compen-sates for this most of the time, occasionalpositioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)can and should be expected. Generally, po-sition errors will be corrected within a fewseconds.

When the vehicle is receiving signals fromsatellites, the “GPS” mark appears at thetop left of the screen.The GPS signal may be physically obstruct-ed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position onthe map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,trucks, or even the placement of objects onthe instrument panel may obstruct the GPSsignals.The GPS satellites may not send signals dueto repairs or improvements being made tothem.Even when the navigation system is receiv-ing clear GPS signals, the vehicle positionmay not be shown accurately or inappropri-ate route guidance may occur in some cas-es.

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This navigation system calculates thecurrent position using satellite signals,various vehicle signals, map data, etc.However, an accurate position may notbe shown depending on satellite condi-tions, road configuration, vehicle condi-tion or other circumstances.

NOTICE

●The installation of window tinting mayobstruct the GPS signals. Most windowtinting contains some metallic contentthat will interfere with GPS signal recep-tion of the antenna in the instrumentpanel. We advise against the use of win-dow tinting on vehicles equipped withnavigation systems.

Page 140: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

140

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Accurate current position may not beshown in the following cases:• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped

road.• When driving on a winding road.• When driving on a slippery road such as

in sand, gravel, snow, etc.• When driving on a long straight road.• When freeway and surface streets run in

parallel.• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.• When a long route is searched during

high speed driving.• When driving without setting the current

position calibration correctly.• After repeating a change of direction by

going forward and backward, or turningon a turntable in a parking lot.

• When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.

• When a roof carrier is installed.• When driving with tire chains installed.• When the tires are worn.• After replacing a tire or tires.• When using tires that are smaller or

larger than the factory specifications.• When the tire pressure in any of the 4

tires is not correct.

Inappropriate route guidance may occur inthe following cases:• When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.• If you set more than 1 destination but skip

any of them, auto reroute will display aroute returning to the destination on theprevious route.

• When turning at an intersection for whichthere is no route guidance.

• When passing through an intersection forwhich there is no route guidance.

• During auto reroute, the route guidancemay not be available for the next turn tothe right or left.

• During high speed driving, it may take along time for auto reroute to operate. Inauto reroute, a detour route may beshown.

• After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.

• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown orannounced.

• If a location has multiple names and thesystem announces 1 or more of them.

• When a route cannot be searched.• If the route to your destination includes

gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the routeguidance may not be shown.

• Your destination point might be shown onthe opposite side of the street. If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,

the current position can be adjustedmanually. For information on setting thecurrent position calibration: →P.135

Page 141: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

141

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

• When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time, season or other reasons.

• The road and map data stored in the navi-gation system may not be complete ormay not be the latest version.

After replacing a tire: →P.136

INFORMATION

●This navigation system uses tire turningdata and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle. Installingtires that are larger or smaller than theoriginally equipped diameter may causeinaccurate display of the current position.The tire pressure also affects the diame-ter of the tires, so make sure that the tirepressure of all 4 tires is correct.

Page 142: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

142

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA

1 Select on the map screen. (→P.78)

2 Select “Map Data”.

3 Check that the map data screen is dis-played.

MAP INFORMATION

Coverage areas and legal informationcan be displayed and map data can beupdated.

No. Function

Map version

Select to update map.

Select to display map coverage ar-eas.

Select to display legal information.

INFORMATION

●Map data updates are available for a fee.Contact your Lexus dealer for furtherinformation.

ABOUT THE MAP DATA

Map data for the navigation system iscontained in a microSD card that is in-serted in the microSD card slot locatedat the bottom of the audio control panel. Do not eject the microSD card, as doingso may deactivate the navigation sys-tem.

NOTICE

●Do not edit or delete the map data on themicroSD card, as doing so may deacti-vate the navigation system.

INFORMATION

●microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C,LLC.

Page 143: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

143

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

Page 144: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

144

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................. 146

2. SOME BASICS......................................... 148TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND

OFF.............................................................................. 148

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ............. 149

DISC SLOT ................................................................. 150

USB/AUX PORT ...................................................... 151

“Sound Settings” SCREEN ................................... 152

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .................. 154

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 156

1. AM/FM RADIO ........................................ 157

OVERVIEW................................................................ 157

PRESET BUTTON SCREEN .............................. 160

SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST .................................................................... 161

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ................ 161

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ...... 163

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.......... 164

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.................................................. 164

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................... 166

2. XM Satellite Radio .................................... 167

OVERVIEW................................................................ 167

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio ....................................... 169

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID ............................ 171

SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST ................................................................................ 171

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS .............................................. 172

3. INTERNET RADIO................................... 174

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO.............. 174

1 BASIC OPERATION 2 RADIO OPERATION

4

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 145: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

4

145

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. CD.................................................................. 175

OVERVIEW................................................................ 175

2. DVD............................................................... 178

OVERVIEW................................................................ 178

DVD OPTIONS......................................................... 181

3. USB MEMORY......................................... 183

OVERVIEW................................................................ 183

4. iPod ................................................................ 187

OVERVIEW................................................................ 187

iPod AUDIO ................................................................ 191

iPod VIDEO ................................................................. 191

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO ................................. 192

OVERVIEW................................................................ 192

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE..................................................................... 197

LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO ............. 197

6. AUX .............................................................. 198

OVERVIEW................................................................ 198

EXTERNAL OPTIONS......................................... 201

1. STEERING SWITCHES ........................ 202

2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES ............................................. 205

1. AUDIO SETTINGS................................. 208

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN .......................... 208

1. OPERATING INFORMATION.......... 213

RADIO........................................................................... 213

DVD PLAYER AND DISC .................................. 214

iPod.................................................................................. 219

FILE INFORMATION.......................................... 220

TERMS ......................................................................... 223

ERROR MESSAGES............................................ 225

3 MEDIA OPERATION 4 AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

5 SETUP

6 TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 146: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

146

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

■ CONTROL SCREEN

The audio control screen can be reached by the following methods:Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button.From the “Menu” screenPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media”.The audio functions can also be displayed and operated on the side display. (With12.3-inch display) (→P.347)Some audio functions can also be operated from the rear seat. (→P.205)

Page 147: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

147

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

Function Page

Using the radio 157

Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc 175

Playing a DVD 178

Playing a USB memory 183

Playing an iPod 187

Playing a Bluetooth® device 192

Using the AUX port 198

Using the steering wheel audio switches 202

Using the rear seat audio control switches* 205

Audio system settings 208

INFORMATION

●The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.

*: If equipped

Page 148: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

148

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. SOME BASICS

“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off. The system turnson in the last mode used. Turn this knob toadjust the volume.“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to dis-play screen buttons for the audio/visual sys-tem.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures of the audio/visual system.Some information may not pertain toyour system.Your audio/visual system works whenthe engine <power> switch is in ACCES-SORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

NOTICE

●To prevent the 12-volt battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the audio/visualsystem on longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running <the hybrid sys-tem is not operating>.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

A function that enables automatic returnto the previous screen from the audio/visual screen can be selected. (→P.61)

Page 149: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

149

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.146)

Using the instrument panel

2 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”button is pressed, the audio sourcechanges.

“RADIO” button: To change radio modes.“MEDIA” button: To change media modes.

From the audio source selection screen

2 Select “Source”.

3 Select the desired source.

1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.146)

2 Select “Source”.

3 Select “Reorder”.

4 Select the desired audio source then“<<” or “>>” to reorder.

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE

INFORMATION

●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.

●When there are two pages, select “ ” or“ ” to change the page.

REORDERING THE AUDIO SOURCE

Page 150: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

150

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.

After insertion, the disc is automaticallyloaded.

1 Press the button and remove thedisc.

DISC SLOT

INSERTING A DISC

EJECTING A DISC

NOTICE

●Never try to disassemble or oil any part ofthe DVD player. Do not insert anythingother than a disc into the slot.

INFORMATION

●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.(12 cm) discs only.

●When inserting a disc, gently insert thedisc with the label facing up.

Page 151: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

151

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Grip the knob to release the lock, andlift the armrest to open.

2 Open the cover and connect a device.

Turn on the power of the device if it is notturned on.

USB/AUX PORT

There are 2 USB ports and an AUX portin the console box.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of thedevice that is connected to the system,the armrest may not close fully. In thiscase, do not forcibly close the armrest asthis may damage the device or the termi-nal, etc.

INFORMATION

●If 2 devices are connected to the USBports, depending on the devices, bothmay not be able to be recognized by thesystem at the same time.

Page 152: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

152

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

When using an iPod video, a cable that hasa 4-pole AUX plug and a USB connector isnecessary. Connect the plug and connec-tor to the AUX and USB ports.

1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.146).

2 Select “Sound”.

3 Select the desired tab to be set.

USING A 4-POLE AUX CABLE

To view a video on an iPod video or Ex-ternal video, it is necessary to use a 4-pole AUX cable to connect the portableaudio device.When connecting a portable audio de-vice to the AUX port, use a 4-pole AUXcable with a plug that matches the exactlayout shown in the illustration.

Connected device (portable audio device, etc.)

Left audio

Right audio

Ground Video

INFORMATION

●If a 4-pole AUX cable with a different lay-out is used, audio and/or video may notbe output properly.

“Sound Settings” SCREEN

No. Information Page

Select to set the tone andbalance. 153

Select to set the DSP con-trol. 154

Select to change audio set-tings. 208

Page 153: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

153

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select the “Sound” tab and select thedesired item to be set.

TONE AND BALANCE

TONE:How good an audio program sounds islargely determined by the mix of the tre-ble, mid and bass levels. In fact, differentkinds of music and vocal programs usu-ally sound better with different mixes oftreble, mid and bass.BALANCE:A good balance of the left and right ste-reo channels and of the front and rearsound levels is also important.Keep in mind that when listening to a ste-reo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase thevolume of 1 group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

No. Function

Select “+” or “-” to adjust high-pitched tones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-pitchedtones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-pitchedtones.

Select to adjust the sound balancebetween the front and rear speakers.

Select to adjust the sound balancebetween the left and right speakers.

Page 154: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

154

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select the “DSP” tab and select the de-sired item to be set.

DVD video/iPod video/External video

1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.146)

2 Select “Options”.

3 Select “Wide”.

4 Select the desired item to be adjusted.

DSP CONTROL

No. Function

The system adjusts to the optimumvolume and tone quality according tovehicle speed to compensate for in-creased vehicle noise.

This function can create a feeling ofpresence.

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

SCREEN SIZE SETTINGS

The screen size can be selected for eachtype of media.

No. Function

Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, witheither side in black.

Select to enlarge the image horizon-tally and vertically to full screen.

Select to enlarge the image by thesame ratio horizontally and vertically.

Page 155: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

155

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

DVD video/iPod video/External video

1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.146)

2 Select “Options”.

3 Select “Display”.

4 Select the desired item to be adjusted.CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT

The brightness, contrast, color and toneof the screen can be adjusted.

Screen button Function

“Color” “R” Select to strengthen thered color of the screen.

“Color” “G”Select to strengthen thegreen color of thescreen.

“Tone” “+” Select to strengthen thetone of the screen.

“Tone” “-” Select to weaken thetone of the screen.

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken thescreen.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the audio source, somefunctions may not be available.

Page 156: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

156

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

GS 450h/GS 350/GS 300

GS F

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

The voice command system and its list ofcommands can be operated. (→P.228)

Page 157: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

157

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

2. RADIO OPERATION

1. AM/FM RADIO

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149

When “Options” is selected

Page 158: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

158

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ CONTROL PANEL

No. Function

Select to display HD) multicast channels available. (→P.164)

Select to display the cache radio operation buttons. (→P.161)

Select to display the radio preset buttons. (→P.160)

Select to display a list of receivable stations. (→P.161)

Select to store artist and song title information. (→P.165)

• Select to scan for receivable stations.• When a program type is selected: Select to scan for receivable stations of the selected

program type/channel category.

Select to change the screen buttons (at the bottom of the screen) to the optional screenbuttons.

Select to seek a receivable station of the selected category.

Select to display the “Type List” screen. (→P.163)

Select to display text messages.

Page 159: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

159

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages. (→P.163)

Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off. When the “HD Radio” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts.

Select to change the screen buttons (at the bottom of the screen) back to the standardscreen buttons.

Cache radio only: Press to turn mute on/off.

• Turn to step up/down frequencies.• Turn to move up/down the list.

• Press to select a preset station.• Press and hold to seek for a station.

INFORMATION

●The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.

No. Function

Page 160: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

160

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Presets”.

2 Select the desired item.

1 Tune in the desired station.

2 Select “Presets”.

3 Select “(Add New)”.To change the preset station to a different

one, select and hold the preset station.

4 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen.

5 Select “OK” after setting the new presetstation.

PRESET BUTTON SCREEN

Two preset button screens are available:the “Mixed Presets” screen and “Individ-ual Presets” screen.On the “Mixed Presets” screen, presetstations for all radio modes (AM, FMand XM Satellite Radio modes) are dis-played together.On the “Individual Presets” screen, onlypreset stations for the current radiomode are displayed.

No. Function

Select to tune in to the desired pre-set station/channel.

Select to change to the “IndividualPresets” screen. (On the “IndividualPresets” screen, select “Mixed Pre-sets” to change to the “Mixed Pre-sets” screen.

Select to display the control screen.

INFORMATION

●On the “Mixed Presets” screen, up to 36stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages)can be set as presets. On the “Individual Presets” screen, up toanother 12 AM stations, 12 FM stations,and 12 XM Satellite Radio stations can beset as presets. (Maximum 72 stations)

PRESETTING A STATION

INFORMATION

●The number of preset radio stations dis-played on the screen can be changed.(→P.209)

Page 161: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

161

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Station List”.

2 FM radio only: Select the desired pro-gram type.

3 Select the desired station.“Info”: Select to display the control screen.

■ REFRESHING THE STATION LIST

1 Select “Refresh” on the “Station List”screen and the following screen will bedisplayed.

“Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the re-fresh.“Source”: Select to change to another au-dio source while refreshing.

1 Select on the right side of the screen.

SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST

INFORMATION

●The audio system sound is muted duringrefresh operation.

●In some situations, it may take some timeto update the station list.

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM

A radio program can be cached andplayed back in a time-shifted manner.

PLAYING BACK THE CACHE MANUALLY

The broadcast cached in the programcache can be played back manually.

Page 162: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

162

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2 Select the desired cache radio opera-tion button.

No. Function

Select: Skips backward 2 minutesSelect and hold: Fast rewinds contin-uously

Returns to the live radio broadcast

Pauses the playback (To restart, se-

lect )

Select: Skips forward 2 minutesSelect and hold: Fast forwards con-tinuously

Hides the cache operation buttons

Red vertical bar: Shows what portionof the cached broadcast is currentlyplayingLight blue bar: Shows time in whichcache writing is in progress

AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF THE CACHE

If the radio broadcast is interrupted byanother audio output, such as anincoming phone call, the system willautomatically cache the interruptedportion and perform time-shift playbackwhen the interruption ends. To manuallyoperate the cache operation: (→P.161)

INFORMATION

●The system can store up to 10 minutes.Cached data will be erased when theradio mode or station is changed or whenthe audio system is turned off.

●If noise or silence occurs during the cach-ing process, cache writing will continue,with the noise or silence recorded as is. Inthis case, the cached broadcast will con-tain the noise or silence when playedback.

Page 163: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

163

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Type”.

3 Select to select a program type/channelcategory.

Once a program type has been set, “TYPESEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:

• “Classical”• “Country”• “EasyLis” (Easy Listening)• “Inform” (Information)• “Jazz”• “News”• “Oldies”• “Other”• “Pop Music”• “Religion”• “Rock”• “R&B” (Rhythm and Blues)• “Sports”• “Talk”• “Traffic” (Not available when “HD Radio”

indicator is off.)• “Alert” (Emergency Alert)

4 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type/channel category.

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages to bereceived from radio stations that utilizeRBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particular pro-gram type,— display messages from radio stations,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available only whenlistening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM Info” indicator is on.

SELECTING A DESIRED PROGRAM TYPE

INFORMATION

●If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.

Page 164: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

164

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select the “HD)” logo.

2 Select the desired channel.Turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob can

also select the desired multicast channel.

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiverwhich allows it to receive digital broad-casts (where available) in addition to theanalog broadcasts it already receives.Digital broadcasts have better soundquality than analog broadcasts as digitalbroadcasts provide free, crystal clearaudio with no static or distortion. Formore information, and a guide to avail-able radio stations and programming,refer to www.hdradio.com.HD Radio features included in Lexusradios:Digital Sound ⎯ HD Radio broadcasts

deliver crystal-clear, digital audio qualityto listeners.HD2/HD3 Channels ⎯ FM stations can

provide additional digital only audio pro-gramming with expanded content andformat choices on HD2/HD3 channels.PSD ⎯ Program Service Data (PSD)

gives you on-screen information such asartist name and song title. iTunes Tagging ⎯ Listeners can tag

(store) songs they like for later review andpurchase through iTunes. Artist Experience ⎯ Images related to

the broadcast are displayed on the radioscreen, such as album cover art and sta-tion logos.

HD Radio Technology manufacturedunder license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarksof iBiquity Digital Corp.

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

MULTICAST

On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplementalprograms on one FM station.

Page 165: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

165

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music in-formation.

2 Connect an iPod. (→P.151)Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not

turned on.Once an iPod is connected, the music tag

moves from the radio into the iPod.When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the

“tagged” information of the songs whichwere tagged while listening to the radio canbe viewed. Then a user may decide to pur-chase the song or CD/Album which hadbeen listened to on their radio.

PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION

Tag information in the music broadcast-ing is preserved in the system and trans-mits to an iPod.

INFORMATION

●The tag information can not be preservedwhile scanning or caching the radio sta-tion.

●If tagging the music information fails,“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will bedisplayed on the screen. If this occurs, tagthe information again.

●HD Radio™ stations can be preset.●An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be

displayed on the screen when in digital.The “HD)” logo will first appear in a graycolor indicating the station is indeed (ananalog and) a digital station. Once thedigital signal is acquired, the logo willchange to a bright orange color.

●The song title, artist name and musicgenre will appear on the screen whenavailable by the radio station. In addition,radios stations may send album coverpictures when available.

●As a user works through the analog radiostations, (where applicable) the radioreceiver will automatically tune from ananalog signal to a digital signal within 5seconds.

Page 166: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

166

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time align-ment- a user may hear ashort period of program-ming replayed or an echo,stutter or skip.

The radio stations analogand digital volume is notproperly aligned or the sta-tion is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. Auser can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending inand out.

Radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up asthe vehicle continues to be driven.Turning the indicator of the “HDRadio” button off can force radio inan analog audio.

Audio mute conditionwhen an HD2/HD3 multi-cast channel had been play-ing.

The radio does not have ac-cess to digital signals at themoment.

This is normal behavior, wait untilthe digital signal returns. If out ofthe coverage area, seek a new sta-tion.

Audio mute delay when se-lecting an HD2/HD3 mul-ticast channel preset.

The digital multicast con-tent is not available until HDRadio™ broadcast can bedecoded and make the au-dio available. This takes upto 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for theaudio to become available.

Text information does notmatch the present song au-dio.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/re-port_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shownfor the present selected fre-quency.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/re-port_radio_station_experiences.

Page 167: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

167

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

2. XM Satellite Radio

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

OVERVIEW

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149

Page 168: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

168

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No. Function

Select to display the radio preset buttons. (→P.160)

Select to display a receivable channel list. (→P.171)

Select to scan for receivable channels of the selected program type/channel category.

Select to display the “Type List” screen. (→P.163)

Select to display text messages.

• Press to select a preset channel.• Press and hold to seek for a channel.

• Turn to step up/down channels.• Turn to move up/down the list.

Page 169: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

169

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inthe vehicle, a subscription to the XMSatellite Radio service is necessary.An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner de-signed exclusively to receive broadcastsprovided under a separate subscription.Availability is limited to the 48 contigu-ous U.S. states and some Canadianprovinces.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE

It is necessary to enter into a separateservice agreement with XM SatelliteRadio in order to receive satellite broad-cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-tional activation and servicesubscription fees apply that are not in-cluded in the purchase price of the vehi-cle and digital satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscrip-tion rates and terms, or to subscribe toXM Satellite Radio:

U.S.A.Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-447-0011.

CanadaRefer to www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

NOTICE

●XM Radio Services ⎯ Legal Disclaimersand Warnings• Fees and Taxes ⎯ Subscription fee,

taxes, one time activation fee, and otherfees may apply. Subscription fee is con-sumer only. All fees and programmingsubject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). XM ser-vice only available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada*.*Canada ⎯ some deterioration of ser-vice may occur in extreme northern lati-tudes. This is beyond the control of XMSatellite Radio.Explicit Language Notice ⎯ Channelswith frequent explicit language are indi-cated with an “XL” preceding the chan-nel name. Channel blocking is availablefor XM Satellite Radio receivers bynotifying XM at;U.S.A. Customers ⎯ Visit www.siriusxm.com Or calling 1-877-447-0011Canadian Customers ⎯ Visit www.siriusxm.ca Or calling 1-877-438-9677

Page 170: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

170

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

NOTICE

●It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disas-semble, reverse engineer, hack, manipu-late, or otherwise make available anytechnology or software incorporated inreceivers compatible with the XM Satel-lite Radio System or that support the XMwebsite, the Online Service or any of itscontent. Furthermore, the AMBE® voicecompression software included in thisproduct is protected by intellectual prop-erty rights including patent rights, copy-rights, and trade secrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

●Note: this applies to XM receivers onlyand not XM Ready devices.

INFORMATION

●XM Radio Services ⎯ Descriptions• Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radiochannels of commercial-free music andpremier sports, news, talk, and enter-tainment. XM is broadcast via satellitesto millions of listeners across the conti-nental United States. XM subscriberslisten to XM on satellite radio receiversfor the car, home, and portable use.More information about XM is availableonline at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) orwww.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

INFORMATION

●XM Radio Services ⎯ SubscriptionInstructions• For XM Services requiring a subscrip-

tion (such as XM Radio, and some Info-tainment & data services), the followingparagraph shall be included.Required XM Radio and some Infotain-ment & data services monthly subscrip-tions sold separately after trial period.Subscription fee is consumer only. Allfees and programming subject tochange. Subscriptions are subject to theCustomer Agreement available atwww.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) orwww.siriusxm.ca (Canada). XM ser-vice only available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadian prov-inces. 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sir-ius, XM and all related marks and logosare trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.All other marks, channel names andlogos are the property of their respec-tive owners. For more information, program sched-ules, and to subscribe or extend sub-scription after complimentary trialperiod; more information is available at: U.S.A. Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-447-0011Canadian Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677

Page 171: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

171

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

If “Ch 000” is selected using the“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will bedisplayed. If another channel is selected,the ID code will no longer be displayed.The channel (000) alternates between dis-playing the radio ID and the specific radiocode.

1 Select “Channel List”.

2 Select the desired channel category.

3 Select the desired channel.“Info”: Select to display the control screen.

INFORMATION

●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsiblefor the quality, availability and content ofthe satellite radio services provided,which are subject to the terms and condi-tions of the XM Satellite Radio customerservice agreement.

●Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”below.

●All fees and programming are theresponsibility of XM Satellite Radio andare subject to change.

SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE

Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are award-ed Type Approval Certificates from XMSatellite Radio Inc. as proof of compati-bility with the services offered by XMSatellite Radio.

INFORMATION

●Infotainment and Data servicesXM offers a variety of advancedInfotainment and data services.

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID

Each XM tuner is identified with aunique radio ID. The radio ID is requiredwhen activating an XM service or whenreporting a problem.

SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST

Page 172: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

172

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS

When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer-ring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.

Message Explanation

“Ck Antenna”

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antennacable is attached securely.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna ca-ble. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.

“Ch Unauth”

You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is beingupdated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radiofor subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you canchoose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listento the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

“No Signal” The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your ve-hicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

“Loading...” The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“Ch Off Air” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Se-lect another channel.

----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated withthe channel at that time. No action is required.

“Ch Unavail”The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If itdoes not change automatically, select another channel.

Page 173: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

173

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

INFORMATION

●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677(Canada).

Page 174: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

174

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. INTERNET RADIO

1 Display the audio source selectionscreen. (→P.149)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton.

The internet radio application screen is dis-played.Perform operations according to the dis-

played application screen.For the instrument panel operation method

and the Remote Touch operation method:→P.149By pressing the “RADIO” button, the

“Audio” screen can be returned to.

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO

One of LEXUS App Suite’s features isthe ability to listen to internet radio. In or-der to use this service, a compatiblephone and the system needs to be setup. For details: →P.334

INFORMATION

●Other applications can be activatedwhile listening to internet radio.

●An iPhone cannot be connected viaBluetooth® and USB connection at thesame time. However, it is possible torecharge an iPhone while using applica-tions by connecting via USB. The systemuses the connection method that wasused last. Therefore, if connected viaUSB after Bluetooth® connection, it isnecessary to reconnect the iPhone viaBluetooth®.

●Some parts of applications can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

●For additional information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

Page 175: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

175

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

3. MEDIA OPERATION

1. CD

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

OVERVIEW

The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149Inserting a disc (→P.150)

Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Page 176: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

176

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No. Function

• Displays cover art• Select to display a track/file list.

• Audio CD: Select to display a track list.• MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list. To return to the top screen, select

“Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to set random playback. (→P.177)

Select to set repeat playback. (→P.177)

• Select to select a track/file.• Select and hold to fast forward.

Select to play/pause.

• Select to select a track/file.• Select and hold to rewind.

Select to select a folder.

Press to play/pause.

• Turn to select a track/file.• Turn to move up/down the list.

• Press to select a track/file.• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

INFORMATION

●If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can beplayed back.

●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 char-acters can be displayed.

Page 177: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

177

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

Audio CD• track repeat → off

MP3/WMA/AAC disc• file repeat → folder repeat → off*1

• file repeat → off*2

*1: When random playback is off*2: When random playback is on

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

Audio CD• random (1 disc random) → off

MP3/WMA/AAC disc• random (1 folder random) →

folder random (1 disc random) → off

REPEATING

The track/file or folder currently beinglistened to can be repeated.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks/files or folders can be automati-cally and randomly selected.

Page 178: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

178

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. DVD

■ CONTROL SCREEN

For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following con-ditions are met:(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.(b) The engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.(c) The parking brake is applied. While driving in DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.The playback condition of some DVD discs may be determined by the DVD softwareproducer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such,some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual thatcomes with the individual DVD disc. (→P.214)

OVERVIEW

The DVD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149Inserting a disc (→P.150)

Page 179: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

179

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

No. Function

Select to display the menu control key.

Full screen/Expand:• Select to display full screen video. (8-inch display)• Select to display expanded screen video. (12.3-inch display)

• Select to select a chapter.• During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.• During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.

Select to play/pause.

Select to stop the video screen.

• Select to select a chapter.• Select and hold to rewind.

Select to display the option screen. (→P.181)

Select to display the menu screen.

Select to display the password input screen.

Press to play/pause.

Page 180: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

180

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Turn to select a chapter.

• Press to select a chapter.• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

WARNING

●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize theimpact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations representthe maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder soundeffects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a sig-nificant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when youadjust the volume.

INFORMATION

●According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see themanual that comes with the DVD disc provided separately.)

●If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the controlis not permitted.

No. Function

Page 181: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

181

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Options”.

2 The following screen is displayed.

1 Select “Search”.

2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.The player starts playing video for that title

number.

1 Select “Audio”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the au-dio language is changed.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.

DVD OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to display the titlesearch screen. 181

Select to display the prede-termined scene on thescreen and start playing.

Select to display the audioselection screen. 181

Select to display the subtitleselection screen. 182

Select to display the angleselection screen. 182

Select to change the screensize. 154

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 155

SEARCHING BY TITLE

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Page 182: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

182

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Subtitle”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the lan-guage the subtitles are displayed in ischanged.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can

be hidden.

1 Select “Angle”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the an-gle is changed.

The angles available are restricted to thoseavailable on the DVD disc.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi-angle compatible when the an-gle mark appears on the screen.

Page 183: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

183

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

3. USB MEMORY

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

OVERVIEW

The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149Connecting a USB memory (→P.151)

Page 184: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

184

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No. Function

• Displays cover art• Select to display a file/track list.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selection screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to set random playback. (→P.186)

Select to set repeat playback. (→P.186)

• Select to select a file/track.• Select and hold to fast forward.

Select to play/pause.

• Select to select a file/track.• Select and hold to rewind.

Select to select a folder/album.

Press to play/pause.

• Turn to select a file/track.• Turn to move up/down the list.

• Press to select a file/track.• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Page 185: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

185

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

WARNING

●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, thearmrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may dam-age the USB memory or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehi-cle may damage the portable player.

●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its ter-minal.

INFORMATION

●If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names.

Page 186: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

186

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

When random playback is off• file/track repeat → folder/album

repeat → off

When random playback is on• file/track repeat → off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 folder/album random) →

folder/album random (all folder/albumrandom) → off

REPEATING

The file/track or folder/album currentlybeing listened to can be repeated.

RANDOM ORDER

Files/tracks or folders/albums can beautomatically and randomly selected.

Page 187: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

187

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

4. iPod

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

OVERVIEW

The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149Connecting an iPod (→P.151)

iPod audio

iPod video

Page 188: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

188

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No.Function

Audio Video

• Displays cover art• Select to display a track list.

To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selectionscreen.To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selectionscreen.To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to set random playback. (→P.191) ⎯

Select to set repeat playback. (→P.191) ⎯

• Select to select a track.• Select and hold to fast forward.

• Select to select a file.• Select and hold to fast forward.

Select to play/pause. Select to play/pause.

• Select to select a track.• Select and hold to rewind.

• Select to select a file.• Select and hold to rewind.

Full screen/Expand:• Select to display full screen video. (8-

inch display)• Select to display expanded screen

video. (12.3-inch display)

⎯ Select to display the option screen. (→P.191)

Page 189: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

189

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Press to play/pause. Press to play/pause.

• Turn to select a track.• Turn to move up/down the list.

• Turn to select a file.• Turn to move up/down the list.

• Press to select a track. • Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

• Press to select a file. • Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

No.Function

Audio Video

Page 190: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

190

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

WARNING

●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the armrestmay not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may damage theiPod or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehi-cle may damage the portable player.

●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its ter-minal.

INFORMATION

●The system can only output the sound while driving.●When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.●Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.●Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This

function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (→P.209) It may take time to display iPod coverart, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod willresume playing from the same point it was last used.

●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be avail-able.

●For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set “Video Sound Input” to “A/V”. (→P.209)

●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation maybecome unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

●The system may not function properly if a conversion adapter is used to connect a device.

Page 191: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

191

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat → off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track shuffle → album shuffle → off

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired settings to change.

iPod AUDIO

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

iPod VIDEO

To change to iPod video mode, select“Browse” on the iPod audio screen, thenselect the “Videos” tab and select thedesired video file.

iPod VIDEO OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to change the screensize. 154

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 155

Select to change audio set-tings. 208

Page 192: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

192

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO

■ CONTROL SCREEN

The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is playedon a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing por-table audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®, theBluetooth® audio system will not function.

OVERVIEW

The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:→P.149Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be avail-able and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (→P.197)

Page 193: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

193

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 194: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

194

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

No. Function

• Displays cover art• Select to display a track list.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the portable device connection screen. (→P.197)

Select to display the playlist screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to set random playback. (→P.197)

Select to set repeat playback. (→P.197)

• Select to select a track. • Select and hold to fast forward.

Select to play/pause.

• Select to select a track. • Select and hold to rewind.

Select to select an album.

Displays Bluetooth® device condition

Press to play/pause.

• Turn to select a track.• Turn to move up/down the list.

• Press to select a track.• Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Page 195: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

195

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

WARNING

●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driv-ing.

●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pace-makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverterdefibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and theBluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implant-able cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantablecardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for informationabout its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpectedeffects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

●Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside thevehicle may damage the portable player.

Page 196: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

196

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

INFORMATION

●Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start

playing when selecting while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when

selecting while it is playing.●In the following conditions, the system may not function:

• The Bluetooth® device is turned off.

• The Bluetooth® device is not connected.

• The Bluetooth® device has a low battery.●It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played.●For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.

●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® net-work when the engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode,the system automatically reconnects the portable player.

●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does nothappen. Reconnect the portable player manually.

●Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected tothe Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove theBluetooth® audio information from the system. (→P.66)

●In some situations, sound output via the Bluetooth® audio system may be out of sync withthe connected device or output intermittently.

Page 197: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

197

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Registering an additional device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

audio control screen.

2 For more information: →P.51

Selecting a registered device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

audio control screen.

2 For more information: →P.53

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat → album repeat → off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• album random → all track random → off

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it isnecessary to register a Bluetooth® de-vice with the system.

LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO

REPEATING

The track or album currently being lis-tened to can be repeated.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

Page 198: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

198

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

6. AUX

■ CONTROL SCREEN

While driving, video will not be displayed. Only sound will be output.

OVERVIEW

The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.149Connecting a device to the AUX port (→P.151)

When “External” is selected

Page 199: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

199

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

No.Function

AUX External

Select to display the external operationscreen. ⎯

Full screen/Expand:• Select to display full screen video. (8-

inch display)• Select to display expanded screen

video. (12.3-inch display)

⎯ Select to display the option screen. (→P.201)

⎯ Select to display the aux operation screen.

Press to turn mute on/off. Press to turn mute on/off.

Page 200: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

200

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

WARNING

●Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the sys-tem, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this maydamage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle maybecome high, resulting in damage to the player.

●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it isconnected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device orits terminal.

INFORMATION

●When connecting an external device that does not output an image, select “AUX”. If“External” is selected, an all-black (blank) screen will be displayed.

●If the source is changed between AUX and External while the system is operating, soundmay not be output momentarily.

Page 201: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

201

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired settings to change.

EXTERNAL OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to change the screensize. 154

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 155

Page 202: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

202

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

1. STEERING SWITCHES

GS 450h/GS 350/GS 300 GS F

Volume control switch

Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

No. Switch

Volume control switch

“∧ ∨” switch

“MODE” switch

Mode Operation Function

All

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously

Page 203: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

203

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

“∧ ∨” switch

Mode Operation Function

AM, FM

Press Preset station up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is beingpressed

SAT

Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Type seek up/down

Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more) Fast up/down

CD

Press Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

MP3/WMA/AAC

disc

Press File up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

DVD

Press Chapter up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

USB

Press File/Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

iPod

Press Track/File up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

Page 204: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

204

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

“MODE” switch

Bluetooth® audio

Press Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

Mode Operation Function

AM, FM, SAT, AUX

Press Change audio modes

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Mute

CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, DVD, USB, iPod, Bluetooth® audio, APPS

Press Change audio modes

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Pause

INFORMATION

●In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selectedAPPS.

Mode Operation Function

Page 205: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

205

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES*

“CH/FLD” switch

Some audio/visual features can be controlled from the rear seats.

*: If equipped

No. Switch

“CH/FLD” switch

“TUNE/TRACK” switch

“VOL” switch

“PWR” switch

“MODE” switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SAT Press Preset station/channel up/down

Station list up/down

MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, DVD, USB,

BT audio

Press Folder/Album up/down

Page 206: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

206

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

“TUNE/TRACK” switch

“VOL” switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SAT

Press Preset station/channel up/downStation list up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is be-ing pressed

CD, MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, DVD, USB, iPod, BT audio

Press Track/file/chapter up/down

Press and hold(0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

Mode Operation Function

All

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold(0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously

Page 207: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

207

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

“PWR” switch

“MODE” switch

Mode Operation Function

All Press Audio system on/off

Mode Operation Function

All Press Change audio modes

Page 208: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

208

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

5. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Audio”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

Detailed audio settings can be pro-grammed.

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN

No. Function Page

Select to set the iPod audiosignal input settings. 209

Select to set the video sig-nal format settings. 209

Select to change the num-ber of preset radio stationsdisplayed on the screen.

209

Select to set detailed coverart settings. 209

*Select to set detailed DVDsettings. 210

*: Only in DVD video mode

Page 209: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

209

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Display the audio setting screen. (→P.208)

2 Select “iPod Settings”.

3 Select “Video Sound Input”.

4 Select a screen button for the desiredsetting.

1 Display the audio setting screen. (→P.208)

2 Select “External Video Settings”.

3 Select “Video Signal Switch”.

4 Select a screen button for the desiredsetting.

1 Display the audio setting screen. (→P.208)

2 Select “Number of Radio Presets”.

3 Select the button with the desired num-ber to be displayed.

“Default”: Select to default the settings.

1 Display the audio setting screen. (→P.208)

2 Select “Cover Art Settings”.

3 Select the desired button to be set.

iPod SETTINGS

EXTERNAL VIDEO SETTINGS

SETTING THE NUMBER OF RADIO PRESETS

COVER ART SETTINGS

No. Function

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in DISC mode.

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in USB mode.

Select on/off to set the priority of theGracenote database in USB mode.

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in iPod mode.

Select on/off to set the priority of theGracenote database in iPod mode.

INFORMATION

●Images from the Gracenote databasedisplayed on the screen may be differentfrom the actual cover art.

Page 210: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

210

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the audio setting screen. (→P.208)

2 Select “DVD Settings”.

3 Select the items to be set.

DVD SETTINGS No. Function Page

Select to change the audiolanguage. 211

Select to change the subti-tle language. 211

Select to change the lan-guage of the DVD videomenu.

211

Select to set the angle markon/off. ⎯

Select to set the parentallock. 211

Select to set the auto startplayback on/off.Discs that are insertedwhile the vehicle is in mo-tion will automatically startplaying. Certain discs maynot play.

Select to set a dynamicrange. 211

Select to initialize all menus. ⎯

Page 211: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

211

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ AUDIO LANGUAGE

1 Select “Audio Language”.

2 Select the desired language to beheard.

If the desired language to be heard cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (→P.212)

■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

1 Select “Subtitle Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be read. If the desired language to be read cannot

be found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (→P.212)

■ MENU LANGUAGE

1 Select “Menu Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be read. If the desired language to be read cannot

be found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (→P.212)

■ PARENTAL LOCK

1 Select “Parental Lock”.

2 Enter the 4-digit personal code.

3 Select a parental level (1-8).

■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE

1 Select “Dynamic Range”.

2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

The difference between the lowest vol-ume and the highest volume can be ad-justed.

Page 212: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

212

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LANGUAGE CODES LIST

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language

0514 English 0515 Esperanto 1214 Lingala 1913 Samoan

1001 Japanese 0520 Estonian 1215 Laotian 1914 Shona

0618 French 0521 Basque 1220 Lithuanian 1915 Somali

0405 German 0601 Persian 1222 Latvian, Lettish 1917 Albanian

0920 Italian 0609 Finnish 1307 Malagasy 1918 Serbian

0519 Spanish 0610 Fiji 1309 Maori 1919 Siswati

2608 Chinese 0615 Faroese 1311 Macedonian 1920 Sesotho

1412 Dutch 0625 Frisian 1312 Malayalam 1921 Sundanese

1620 Portuguese 0701 Irish 1314 Mongolian 1923 Swahili

1922 Swedish 0704 Scottish-Gaelic 1315 Moldavian 2001 Tamil

1821 Russian 0712 Galician 1318 Marathi 2005 Telugu

1115 Korean 0714 Guarani 1319 Malay 2007 Tajik

0512 Greek 0721 Gujarati 1320 Maltese 2008 Thai

0101 Afar 0801 Hausa 1325 Burmese 2009 Tigrinya

0102 Abkhazian 0809 Hindi 1401 Nauru 2011 Turkmen

0106 Afrikaans 0818 Croatian 1405 Nepali 2012 Tagalog

0113 Amharic 0821 Hungarian 1415 Norwegian 2014 Setswana

0118 Arabic 0825 Armenian 1503 Occitan 2015 Tongan

0119 Assamese 0901 Interlingua 1513 (Afan) Oromo 2018 Turkish

0125 Aymara 0905 Interlingue 1518 Oriya 2019 Tsonga

0126 Azerbaijani 0911 Inupiak 1601 Punjabi 2020 Tatar

0201 Bashkir 0914 Indonesian 1612 Polish 2023 Twi

0205 Byelorussian 0919 Icelandic 1619 Pashto, Pushto 2111 Ukrainian

0207 Bulgarian 0923 Hebrew 1721 Quechua 2118 Urdu

0208 Bihari 1009 Yiddish 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 2126 Uzbek

0209 Bislama 1023 Javanese 1814 Kirundi 2209 Vietnamese

0214 Bengali, Bangla 1101 Georgian 1815 Romanian 2215 Volapük

0215 Tibetan 1111 Kazakh 1823 Kinyarwanda 2315 Wolof

0218 Breton 1112 Greenlandic 1901 Sanskrit 2408 Xhosa

0301 Catalan 1113 Cambodian 1904 Sindhi 2515 Yoruba

0315 Corsican 1114 Kannada 1907 Sango 2621 Zulu

0319 Czech 1119 Kashmiri 1908 Serbo-Croatian

0325 Welsh 1121 Kurdish 1909 Sinhalese

0401 Danish 1125 Kirghiz 1911 Slovak

0426 Bhutani 1201 Latin 1912 Slovenian

Page 213: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

213

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1. OPERATING INFORMATION

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 25 miles (40km). Once outside this range, you may no-tice fading and drifting, which increase withthe distance from the radio transmitter.They are often accompanied by distortion.Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehi-cle’s antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each otherout, causing a momentary flutter or loss ofreception.Static and fluttering: These occur when sig-nals are blocked by buildings, trees or otherlarge objects. Increasing the bass level mayreduce static and fluttering.Station swapping: If the FM signal being lis-tened to is interrupted or weakened, andthere is another strong station nearby onthe FM band, the radio may tune in the sec-ond station until the original signal can bepicked up again.

NOTICE

●To avoid damage to the audio/visual sys-tem:• Be careful not to spill beverages over

the audio/visual system.• Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc slot.

INFORMATION

●The use of a cellular phone inside or nearthe vehicle may cause a noise from thespeakers of the audio/visual system whichyou are listening to. However, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.

RADIO

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withthe radio — it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and ter-rain can interfere with FM reception.Power lines or phone wires can interferewith AM signals. And of course, radiosignals have a limited range. The fartherthe vehicle is from a station, the weakerits signal will be. In addition, receptionconditions change constantly as the ve-hicle moves.Here, some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate aproblem with the radio are described.

FM

Page 214: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

214

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by theupper atmosphere — especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to sound al-ternately strong and weak.Station interference: When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from a ra-dio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with each oth-er, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.Static: AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as high ten-sion power lines, lightening or electricalmotors. This results in static.

Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

This DVD player is intended for use with4.7 in. (12 cm). discs only.Extremely high temperatures can keep the

DVD player from working. On hot days,use the air conditioning system to cool theinside of the vehicle before using the player.Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make

the DVD player skip. If moisture gets into the DVD player, the

discs may not be able to be played. Removethe discs from the player and wait until itdries.

AM

XM

DVD PLAYER AND DISC

WARNING

●The DVD player uses an invisible laserbeam which could cause hazardous radi-ation exposure if directed outside theunit. Be sure to operate the player cor-rectly.

Page 215: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

215

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Use only discs marked as shown above.The following products may not be playableon your player:• SACD• dts CD• Copy-protected CD• DVD-Audio• Video CD• DVD-RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

DVD PLAYER

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD-R/RW discs

Page 216: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

216

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Labeled discs

Handle discs carefully, especially wheninserting them. Hold them on the edge anddo not bend them. Avoid getting finger-prints on them, particularly on the shinyside.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other

disc damage could cause the player to skipor to repeat a section of a track. (To see apin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)Remove discs from the players when not in

use. Store them in their plastic cases awayfrom moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-freecloth that has been dampened with water.Wipe in a straight line from the center to theedge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it withanother soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use aconventional record cleaner or anti-staticdevice.

NOTICE

●Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

●This system is not designed for use ofDual Discs. Do not use Dual Discsbecause they may cause damage to theplayer.

●Do not use discs with a protection ring.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

●Do not use printable discs. The use ofsuch discs may damage the player, or itmay be impossible to eject the disc.

Correct Wrong

Page 217: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

217

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot be played. It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW

discs recorded on a music CD recorder or apersonal computer because of disc charac-teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit. It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and the envi-ronment. Record with the correct format.(For details, contact the appropriate appli-cation manufacturers of the applications.)CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by

direct exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player,

playback will begin more slowly than with aconventional CD or CD-R disc.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

played using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs havethe following region code indicating whichcountries the DVD video disc can be playedin on this DVD player. If you attempt to playan inappropriate DVD video disc on thisplayer, error message appears on thescreen. Even if the DVD video disc does nothave a region code, there are cases when itcannot be used.

CD-R/RW AND DVD-R/RW DISCS

DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD video discsconforming to another format such asSECAM cannot be used.

Code Country

ALL All countries

1 North America

Page 218: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

218

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEODISCS

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc thatholds video. DVD video discs have adopted“MPEG2”, one of the world standards ofdigital compression technologies. The pic-ture data is compressed by 1/40 on aver-age and stored. Variable rate encodedtechnology in which the volume of data as-signed to the picture is changed dependingon the picture format has also been adopt-ed. Audio data is stored using PCM andDolby Digital, which enables higher qualityof sound. Furthermore, multi-angle andmulti-language features will also help usersenjoy the more advanced technology ofDVD video.Viewer restrictions: This feature limits whatcan be viewed in conformity with a level ofrestrictions of the country. The level of re-strictions varies depending on the DVD vid-eo disc. Some DVD video discs cannot beplayed at all, or violent scenes are skippedor replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for childrenand G-rated movie can be played.

• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discscan be played.

NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PALformat of color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screen tobe selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates a regioncode by which this vid-eo disc can be played.“ALL”: in all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

Page 219: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

219

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Multi-angle feature: The same scene canbe enjoyed from different angles.Multi-language feature: The subtitle andaudio language can be selected.Region codes: The region codes are pro-vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the same re-gion code as the DVD player, you cannotplay the disc on the DVD player. For regioncodes: (→P.217)Audio: This DVD player can play linearPCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-mat DVDs. Other decoded types cannot beplayed.Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored in DVD video discs are divid-ed into parts by title and chapter.Title: The largest unit of the video and audioprograms stored on DVD video discs. Usu-ally, one movie, one album, or one audioprogram is assigned as a title.Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. Atitle comprises of several chapters.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”mean that an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connect specifically toiPod or iPhone, respectively, and has beencertified by the developer to meet Appleperformance standards.Apple is not responsible for the operation

of this device or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please note thatthe use of this accessory with iPod oriPhone, may affect wireless performance. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other countries.Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.The Lightning connector works with

iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPod touch(5th generation), and iPod nano (7th gen-eration).The 30-pin connector works with iPhone

4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th genera-tion), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1stthrough 6th generation).USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c,

iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1stthrough 5th generation), iPod classic, andiPod nano (1st through 7th generation).

Bluetooth® technology works with iPhone5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, andiPod touch (2nd through 5th generation).

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

iPod

Page 220: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

220

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPodclassic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devic-es can be used with this system.Made for

• iPod touch (5th generation)*• iPod touch (4th generation)• iPod touch (3rd generation)• iPod touch (2nd generation)• iPod touch (1st generation)• iPod classic• iPod with video• iPod nano (7th generation)*• iPod nano (6th generation)• iPod nano (5th generation)• iPod nano (4th generation)• iPod nano (3rd generation)• iPod nano (2nd generation)• iPod nano (1st generation)• iPhone 5s*• iPhone 5c*• iPhone 5*• iPhone 4S• iPhone 4• iPhone 3GS• iPhone 3G• iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

■ COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES

■ COMPATIBLE COMPRESSEDFILES

COMPATIBLE MODELS

INFORMATION

●Depending on differences between mod-els or software versions etc., some mod-els might be incompatible with thissystem.

FILE INFORMATION

USB communicationformats

USB 2.0 HS(480 Mbps) andFS (12 Mbps)

File formats FAT 16/32

Correspondence class Mass storageclass

Item USB/iPod DISC

Compatiblefile format(audio)

MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in thedevice

Maximum 3000

Maxi-mum192

Files in thedevice

Maximum 9999

Maxi-mum255

Files per folder

Maximum 255 ⎯

Page 221: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

221

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CORRESPONDING SAMPLINGFREQUENCY

■ CORRESPONDING BIT RATES*1

■ COMPATIBLE CHANNEL MODES

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA(Windows Media Audio) and AAC(Advanced Audio Coding) are audio com-pression standards.This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC

files on CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RWdiscs and USB memory.This system can play disc recordings com-

patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2and with the Romeo and Joliet file systemand UDF (2.01 or lower).When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,

add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/.m4a). This system plays back files with .mp3/

.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/AAC files respectively. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropriatefile extension.This system can play only the first session/

border when using multi session/bordercompatible discs.

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48

MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8, 9* (9.1/9.2) 32/44.1/48

AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC

11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48

*: Only compatible with Windows MediaAudio Standard

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320

MP3 files:MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:Ver. 9*2 (9.1/9.2) CBR 48 - 320

AAC files:MPEG4/AAC-LC 8 - 320

*1: Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible*2: Only compatible with Windows Media

Audio Standard

File type Channel mode

MP3 files Stereo, joint stereo, dualchannel and monaural

WMA files 2ch

AAC files 1ch, 2ch (Dual channel is notsupported)

Page 222: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

222

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 TagVer. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 for-mats. This system cannot display disc title,track title and artist name in other formats.WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/

AAC tag that is used in the same way as anID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-tion such as track title and artist name.The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3 files.This system can play back AAC files

encoded by iTunes.

The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-erally improves with higher bit rates. Inorder to achieve a reasonable level ofsound quality, discs recorded with a bit rateof at least 128 kbps are recommended.m3u playlists are not compatible with the

audio player.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audioplayer.The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-

able Bit Rate).When playing back files recorded as VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if the fast for-ward or reverse operations are used. It is not possible to check folders that do not

include MP3/WMA/AAC files.MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8

levels deep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous levels offolders. For this reason, we recommendcreating discs with no more than 2 levels offolders.

Page 223: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

223

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4The play order of the compact disc with thestructure shown above is as follows:

The order changes depending on the per-sonal computer and MP3/WMA/AACencoding software you use.

This is a general term that describes the pro-cess of writing data on-demand to CD-R,etc., in the same way that data is written tofloppy or hard discs.

This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack number, track title, the artist’s name,the album title, the music genre, the year ofproduction, comments, cover art and otherdata. The contents can be freely editedusing software with ID3 tag editing func-tions. Although the tags are restricted to anumber of characters, the information canbe viewed when the track is played back.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track titleand artist name.

This is the international standard for the for-matting of CD-ROM folders and files. Forthe ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels ofregulations.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8

character file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composed ofone-byte capital letters and numbers. The“_” symbol may also be included.)Level 2: The file name can have up to 31

characters (including the separation mark“.” and file extension). Each folder mustcontain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

TERMS

PACKET WRITE

ID3 TAG

001.mp3 002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2004.mp3005.wma

Folder 3006.m4a

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.m4a

WMA TAG

ISO 9660 FORMAT

m3u

MP3

Page 224: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

224

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft®. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and9.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Codingand refers to an audio compression tech-nology standard used with MPEG2 andMPEG4.

WMA

AAC

Page 225: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

225

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

ERROR MESSAGES

Mode Message Explanation

CD/DVD

“No disc found.” It indicates that there is no disc in the DVD play-er.

“Check disc”

It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted upside down. Clean the disc or in-sert it correctly.It indicates a disc which is not playable is insert-ed.

“DISC Error” There is a trouble inside the system.Eject the disc.

“Region Code Error” It indicates that the DVD region code is not setproperly.

USB

“USB Error” This indicates a problem in the USB memory orits connection.

“No music files found.” This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC filesare included in the USB memory.

iPod

“iPod Error.” This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-nection.

“No music files found.” This indicates that there is no music data in theiPod.

“No video files found.” This indicates that no video files are included inthe iPod.

“Please check the iPodfirmware version.”

This indicates that the software version is notcompatible. Perform the iPod firmware updatesand try again.

“iPod authorization failed.” This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.Please check your iPod.

Bluetooth® Audio

“Music tracks not support-ed. Please check your por-table player.”

This indicates a problem in the Bluetooth® de-vice.

Page 226: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

226

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

INFORMATION

●If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Page 227: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

5

227

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

8

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 228

USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .................................................................. 228

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ....................................................... 229

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION............................ 236

3. COMMAND LIST................................... 237

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT ............................ 242

1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

2 MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Page 228: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

228

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

GS 450h/GS 350/GS 300

GS F

Talk switchPress the talk switch to start the voice com-

mand system.To cancel voice recognition, press and hold

the talk switch.

It is unnecessary to speak directly into themicrophone when giving a command.

The voice command system enables theaudio/visual, hands-free systems, etc. tobe operated using voice commands.Refer to the command list for samples ofvoice commands. (→P.237)

USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

STEERING SWITCH

MICROPHONE

INFORMATION

●Wait for the confirmation beep beforespeaking a command.

●Voice commands may not be recognizedif:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while voice com-

mands are spoken.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

towards the microphone.

Page 229: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

229

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch. If the shortcut menu screen is displayed,

say “Main menu” or select “Main menu” todisplay the main menu screen.

2 Say the desired category name.All shortcut commands can be recognized

on this screens.To display the shortcut menu screen, say

“Shortcut menu” or select “Shortcutmenu”.

3 Say or select the desired command onthe screen.

INFORMATION

●In the following conditions, the systemmay not recognize the command prop-erly and using voice commands may notbe possible:• The command is incorrect or unclear.

Note that certain words, accents orspeech patterns may be difficult for thesystem to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise,such as wind noise.

●This system may not operate immediatelyafter the engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>mode.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

The voice command system is operatedby speaking commands correspondingto each function. Commands can beconfirmed on the screen. The voicecommand system can be operated fromeither the main menu screen or shortcutmenu screen.

OPERATION FROM THE MAIN MENU

Voice guidance for the voice commandsystem can be skipped by pressing thetalk switch.

Saying “Help” or selecting “?” promptsvoice guidance to offer examples ofcommands and operation methods.

Page 230: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

230

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Press the talk switch. If the main menu screen is displayed, say

“Shortcut menu” or select “Shortcut menu”to display the shortcut menu screen.

2 Say the tab selection command or se-lect the desired tab.

All commands, including those which arenot displayed on the screen, can be recog-nized.Commands related to each function are

displayed on the screen of each functiontab.To display the main menu screen, say “Main

menu” or select “Main menu”.

3 Say the desired command.Registered POIs, registered names in the

contacts list etc., can be said in the place ofthe “<>” next to the commands. (→P.237)For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,“Call John Smith” etc. If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no

selections are available, perform one of thefollowing to return to the previous screen:• Say “Go back”.• Select “Go Back”.

To cancel voice recognition, select ,or press and hold the talk switch.

OPERATION FROM THE SHORTCUTS

Voice guidance for the voice commandsystem can be skipped by pressing thetalk switch.

Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance tooffer examples of commands and opera-tion methods.

Page 231: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

231

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

■ DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings”SCREENS

1 Select .The “Voice Settings” screen will be dis-

played. (→P.67)

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Voice”.

4 Select “Train Voice Recognition”.The user will be asked to say sample

phrases. This will help the voice commandsystem adapt to the user’s accent.

INFORMATION

●If the system does not respond or theconfirmation screen does not disappear,press the talk switch and try again.

●If a voice command cannot be recog-nized, follow the voice guidance and saythe voice command again.

●If a voice command cannot be recog-nized 5 times consecutively, voice recog-nition will be canceled. Press the talk switch to restart the voicecommand system.

●“Display Voice Confirmations” can be seton/off on the “Voice Settings” screen.(→P.67)

●When “Display Voice Confirmations” isset to on, voice recognition prompts willbe displayed for some voice commandswhen recognized. If the recognized com-mand is correct, say “Yes” or select “Yes”.(Saying “No” or selecting “No” will dis-play the previous screen.)

●When “Display Voice Confirmations” isset to off, voice recognition prompts willonly be displayed for important voicecommands.

●If “Display Voice Confirmations” is set toon and commands are generally recog-nized correctly, a confirmation screenmay be displayed asking if you wouldwish to set “Display Voice Confirmations”to off. To set to off, say “Yes” or select“Yes”.

●“Voice Recognition Prompts” can be setto on or off on the “Voice Settings”screen. (→P.67)

INFORMATION

●Voice guidance can be canceled by set-ting voice prompts to off. Use this settingwhen it is desirable to say a commandimmediately after pressing the talk switchand hearing a beep.

●With 12.3-inch display: The side displaycannot be operated during voice recog-nition.

INCREASING THE VOICE RECOGNITION PERFORMANCE

Page 232: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

232

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Launch <application name>”.LEXUS App Suite application screen is dis-

played.

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Enter an address”.

3 Say “<house number, street name, cityname, State>” in succession.

As voice commands spoken in French areonly available for addresses in Quebec,Canada, it is not necessary to say “<State>”in French.

A confirmation screen will be displayedshowing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.Some areas cannot be recognized by the

voice recognition system. If voice commands cannot be recognized

repeatedly, a confirmation screen may bedisplayed asking if you would wish to call a“Destination Assist” operator for help.(→P.339) To call an operator, say “Yes” orselect “Yes”. (Saying “No” or selecting“No” will display the previous screen.)

4 If the recognized address is correct, say“Yes” or select “Yes”.

To correct the city name, street name, orhouse number, say “Change city”, “Changestreet”, or “Change house number”. (Saying“No” or “Go Back”, or selecting “No” or“Go Back” will display the previousscreen.)

5 Say “Go directly” or select “Go Direct-ly”.

After this, follow the voice guidance andsearch for a destination route by voicecommand operation.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: LAUNCH LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION*

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS (ENGLISH AND FRENCH ONLY)*

*: With 12.3-inch display

For information regarding the state/province setting to perform a destinationsearch by address: →P.95

Page 233: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

233

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Play song <name>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.The system starts playing music and the

song lists are displayed.

INFORMATION

●The voice command recognition isdesigned to recognize the main body ofthe official street name.

For example: if the official street name is“East Main Street”, the voice commandrecognition will recognize “Main”.●Say the desired number, cardinal direc-

tion etc. in the place of the “<>”.For example: Say “West 555”.●Inputting the house number can be

skipped.●Even if the state set using voice recogni-

tion is different from the set state in the“Address” screen (which was set when adestination was set manually), the setstate in the “Address” screen will notchange. (→P.96)

●The house number voice recognitionconditions are outlined below:• Numerals: 10 digits or less• Numerals and cardinal direction or a

hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 dig-its or less (Do not say “and”.)

• Cardinal direction or a hyphen andnumerals: A total of 9 digits or less(Do not say “and”.)

• Numerals are recognized as singledigits only.

• The cardinal direction and hyphensare only recognized once.

• The following cardinal directions canbe recognized: North, East, West andSouth.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A SONG

Page 234: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

234

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Call <contacts> <phone types>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.

INFORMATION

●The Gracenote database is only compati-ble with the USB or iPod mode.

●The list screens can be operated byselecting using the Remote Touch as wellas by recognizing the voice commands.

●A USB memory or iPod must be con-nected to enable track searching andplayback. (→P.183, 187)

●When a USB memory or iPod is con-nected, recognition data is created sotracks can be searched using voice com-mands.

●Recognition data is updated under thefollowing conditions:• When the USB memory or iPod data

has changed.• When the voice recognition language is

changed. (→P.61)●While the recognition data is being cre-

ated or being updated, a track searchcannot be performed using a voice com-mand.

●When the “Music” tab is disappeared onthe shortcut menu screen, it is not possi-ble to search for a track using a voicecommand.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME

Page 235: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

235

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say the phone number. In the same manner as it is displayed on the

screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying “Diala number” say the phone number. Say the phone number one digit at a time.

For example, if the phone number is2345678:Say “two three four five six seven eight”

3 Say “Call” or press the switch onthe steering wheel.

When the confirmation screen appears,

say “Yes” or select “Yes” or press the switch on the steering wheel.

INFORMATION

●In the same manner as it is displayed onthe screen, “Call <contacts> <phonetypes>”, after saying “Call a contact” saythe name, or the name and type of phone,of a contact.For example: “Call a contact”, “JohnSmith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary Davis”,“Mobile”

●There are 4 types of phones: Home,Mobile, Office and Other.

●Short or abbreviated names in the con-tacts list may not be recognized. Changenames in the contacts list to full names.

●Sometimes a voice recognition resultconfirmation screen will be displayed.After confirming the result, say “Yes” or“No”.

●When the system recognizes multiplenames from the contacts list, a name can-didate list will be displayed on the screen.If the desired name is not displayed on thetop of the screen, say or select the num-ber of the name from the candidate list toselect a name from the candidate list.

●When a contact has multiple phone num-bers registered in the contacts list, a can-didate list will be displayed. If the desiredphone number is not displayed on the topof the screen, say or select the number ofthe desired phone number from the can-didate list to select a phone number fromthe candidate list.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER

When the system recognizes multiplephone numbers, a phone number candi-date list will be displayed on the screen.

Pressing the switch on the steeringwheel makes a call to the top entry on thelist. If the desired phone number is notdisplayed on the top of the screen, saythe number of the desired phone numberfrom the candidate list to select a phonenumber from the candidate list.

Page 236: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

236

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION

Due to natural language speech recog-nition technology, this system enablesrecognition of a command when spokennaturally. However, the system cannotrecognize every variation of each com-mand. In some situations, it is possible toomit the command for the procedureand directly state the desired operation.

INFORMATION

●If the command cannot be recognizedcompletely, the command input screenwill be displayed. (Search results will beshown based on the part of the commandthat was recognized.)

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION

Command Expression examples

“Go Home”* Navigate to my house.Take me home.

“Enter an Address”*

I need a route to a streetaddress.Give me a street.

“Find <POI category>”*

Search for a <Restau-rants> around here.I need a route to a near-by <Restaurants>.

“Call <name><type>”

Get me <RobertBrown>.Contact the <RobertBrown> phone of<Work>.

“Dial <number>”Can you get me<3334445555>.Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist <name>”

Play the artist <name>. I want to hear the band<name>.

“Play Album <name>”

Switch to the album<name>.

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 237: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

237

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

3. COMMAND LIST

Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables. For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be dis-

played in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be dis-played in the screen.

The functions available may vary according to the system installed.

Basic

Apps (With 12.3-inch display)When the voice recognition language is set to English.

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

Voice recognition language can be changed. (→P.61)

Command Action

“Help” Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commandsor operation methods

“Go Back” Returns to the previous screen

“Go to <tab>” Displays the command list of the selected tab

“More Hints” Displays more commonly used commands

“Cancel” Cancels the voice command system

Command Action

“Launch <apps>” Activates the LEXUS App Suite application

Page 238: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

238

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Navi (With 12.3-inch display)

Phone

Command Action

“Find <POI category>” Displays a list of <POI category*1> near the current posi-tion*2

“Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the address

“Go Home” Displays the route to home

“Pause Guidance” Stops the route guidance

“Resume Guidance” Resumes the route guidance

“Show <POI> icons” Displays the specified POI icons

“Delete Destination” Deletes the destination

“Previous Destination” Displays previous destinations

*1:For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc.*2:Depending on the search results, a POI list may be provided by a relevant POI appli-

cation of the LEXUS App suite. (→P.334)

Command Action

“Redial” Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoingcall

“Call Back” Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call

“Show Recent Calls” Displays the call history screen

“Dial <phone number>” Places a call to the said phone number

“Call <contacts> <phonetypes>” Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from thephone book

“Mobile Assistant” Activates Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free mode

Page 239: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

239

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

Radio

Command Action

“Tune to <frequency> AM” Changes the radio to the specified AM frequency

“Tune to <frequency> FM” Changes the radio to the specified FM frequency

“Play <genre> station” Changes the radio to an FM station of the specified genre

“Tune to FM <frequency> HD <number>” Changes the radio to the specified HD radio station

“Tune to preset <number>” Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station

“Tune to <name>” Changes the radio to the satellite radio channel with thespecified name

“Tune to channel <number>” Changes the radio to the specified satellite radio channelnumber

“Play <genre> satellite station” Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the spec-ified genre

“AM Radio” Selects AM radio mode

“FM Radio” Selects FM radio mode

“Sirius XM” Selects satellite radio mode

Page 240: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

240

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Audio

Info

Command Action

“Play Playlist <name>” Plays tracks from the selected playlist

“Play Artist <name>” Plays tracks from the selected artist

“Play Song <name>” Plays the selected track

“Play Album <name>” Plays tracks from the selected album

“Turn Music On” Turns the audio system on

“Turn Music Off” Turns the audio system off

“Disc” Selects the selected disc mode

“USB” Selects USB audio mode

“iPod” Selects iPod audio mode

“Bluetooth* Audio” Selects Bluetooth® audio mode

“External” Selects VTR mode

“Auxiliary” Selects AUX audio mode

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Blue-tooth SIG, Inc.

Command Action

“Destination Assist”* Connects the system to the Lexus response center

“Show Forecast” Displays weather information

“Show Traffic” Displays traffic information

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 241: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

241

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

Climate

Command Action

“Turn Climate Control On” Turns air conditioning system on

“Turn Climate Control Off” Turns air conditioning system off

“Warmer” Increases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“Cooler” Decreases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“<#> degrees” Changes the set temperature of the air conditioning sys-tem to <#> degrees*

*: Only within the possible temperature range of the air conditioning system

INFORMATION

●Commands relating to operation of the audio/visual and air conditioning systems can onlybe performed when the audio and air conditioning systems are turned on.

Page 242: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

242

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT

1 Press and hold this switch until you hearthe beeps.

GS 450h/GS 350/GS 300

GS F

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used onlywhen the “Mobile Assistance” screen isdisplayed.

To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select

“Cancel”, or press and hold the on thesteering wheel.To restart the Mobile Assistant for addi-

tional commands, press the on thesteering wheel.• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted

after the system responds to a voice com-mand.

• After some phone and music commands,the Mobile Assistant feature will automat-ically end to complete the requestedaction.

The Mobile Assistant feature willactivate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free modevia the steering wheel switches. Tooperate the Mobile Assistant, acompatible cellular phone must beregistered and connected to this systemvia Bluetooth®. (→P.44.)

The volume of the Mobile Assistant canbe adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knobor steering wheel volume controlswitches. The Mobile Assistant andphone call volumes are synchronized.

Page 243: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

243

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

INFORMATION

●The available features and functions mayvary based on the iOS version installedon the connected device.

●Some Siri features are limited in EyesFree mode. If you attempt to use anunavailable function, Siri will inform youthat the function is not available.

●If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phoneconnected via Bluetooth®, an error mes-sage will be displayed on the screen.

●While a phone call is active, the MobileAssistant cannot be used.

●If using the navigation feature of the cellu-lar phone, ensure the active audio sourceis Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order tohear turn by turn direction prompts.

MICROPHONE

It is not necessary to speak directly intothe microphone when using the MobileAssistant. (Microphone location:→P.228.)

INFORMATION

●Wait for the listening beeps before usingthe Mobile Assistant.

●The Mobile Assistant may not recognizecommands in the following situations:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while the Mobile

Assistant is being used.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

toward the microphone.

Page 244: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

244

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Page 245: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

6

245

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION .................................. 246

DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION................................................. 246

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS ............. 247

SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS ......... 247

1 INFORMATION DISPLAY

INFORMATION*

*: This function is not made available on some models.

Page 246: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

246

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Weather”.

4 Check that the “Weather” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the “Weather” screen. (→P.246)

2 Select “Current Weather”.

3 Select the desired tab to be displayed.When the “3 Day” tab is selected: When a

specific day is selected, weather informa-tion for that day will be displayed.

Doppler weather radar information canbe received via HD Radio broadcast orby the LEXUS App Suite application ona Bluetooth® phone. For details aboutthe LEXUS App Suite application: →P.327

DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION

No. Function

Select to display the weather of thecurrent location. (→P.246)

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the recentlychecked locations list.

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the national citieslist.

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the other local citieslist.

Select to display Doppler weatherradar information over the map.

DISPLAYING THE WEATHER OF THE CURRENT LOCATION

Page 247: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

247

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

6

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Data Services”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS

Data service information, which is com-prised of traffic information and weatherinformation, can be received via HD Ra-dio broadcast and by the LEXUS AppSuite application on a Bluetooth®

phone. The receiving method can be setto both or only via HD Radio broadcast.For details about the LEXUS App Suiteapplication: →P.327

No. Function

Select to receive data service infor-mation via both HD Radio broadcastand the LEXUS App Suite applica-tion on a Bluetooth® phone. Whenboth methods are available, HD Ra-dio broadcast will be selected.

Select to receive data only via HDRadio broadcast.

Page 248: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

248

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Page 249: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

7

249

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR ............................................. 250

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR...... 250

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS .............................. 250

SCREEN DISPLAY ................................................ 252

USING THE SYSTEM.......................................... 253

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 255

SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 255

PARKING .................................................................. 256

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 257

SCREEN DESCRIPTION ................................... 257

PARKING .................................................................. 258

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS .......... 259

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN................ 259

THE CAMERA ........................................................ 260

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD ........................... 261

WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS.......... 262

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ..................................................... 264

IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS .......... 264

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ........... 266

TYPES OF SENSORS.......................................... 266

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SWITCH.................................................................. 266

DISPLAY ..................................................................... 267

SENSOR DETECTION DISPLAY, OBSTACLE DISTANCE ................................ 269

DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS ............................................................... 272

THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST CAN BE OPERATED WHEN ...................... 273

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DISPLAY.................................................................. 273

SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION.................................................. 273

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING ....................................... 276

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING.................................................. 277

ALERT VOLUME SETTING.............................. 277

DISPLAY ON/OFF SETTING......................... 278

ALERT DISTANCE SETTING.......................... 278

1 LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

2 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 250: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

250

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

The parking assist monitor assists thedriver by displaying an image of the viewbehind the vehicle while backing up, forexample while parking.

INFORMATION

● The screen illustrations used in this textare intended as examples, and may differfrom the image that is actually displayedon the screen.

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

The parking assist monitor is a supple-mental device intended to assist thedriver when backing up. When backingup, be sure to visually check all aroundthe vehicle both directly and using themirrors before proceeding. If you donot, you may hit another vehicle, andcould possibly cause an accident.Pay attention to the following precau-tions when using the parking assist mon-itor.

WARNING

● Never depend on the parking assist mon-itor entirely when backing up. The imageand the position of the guide lines dis-played on the screen may differ from theactual state.Use caution, just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing thebrake pedal to control vehicle speed.

● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi-cle.

● The instructions given are only guidelines.When and how much to turn the steeringwheel will vary according to traffic condi-tions, road surface conditions, vehiclecondition, etc. when parking. It is neces-sary to be fully aware of this before usingthe parking assist system.

● When parking, be sure to check that theparking space will accommodate yourvehicle before maneuvering into it.

Page 251: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

251

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

WARNING

● Do not use the parking assist monitor sys-tem in the following cases:• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow• When using tire chains or emergency

tires• When the trunk is not closed com-

pletely• On roads that are not flat or straight,

such as curves or slopes● In low temperatures, the screen may

darken or the image may become faint.The image could distort when the vehicleis moving, or you may become unable tosee the image on the screen. Be sure tovisually check all around the vehicle bothdirectly and using the mirrors before pro-ceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the positionof the guide lines displayed on the screenmay change.

● The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tances between objects and pedestriansthat appear in the image displayed on thescreen will differ from the actual dis-tances. (→P.261)

Page 252: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

252

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Intuitive parking assist*

If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown in thetop right corner of the screen.

SCREEN DISPLAY

The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the “R”position while the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

CANCELING LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any positionother than the “R” position.

*: With 8-inch display

Page 253: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

253

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Estimated course line display mode (→P.255)

Parking assist guide line display mode (→P.257)

Distance guide line display mode

USING THE SYSTEM

Use any of the following modes.

Estimated course lines are displayedwhich move in accordance with the op-eration of the steering wheel.

The steering wheel return points (park-ing assist guide lines) are displayed.

Distance guide lines only are displayed.

Page 254: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

254

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select “Backup Camera Guide LineSettings”.

5 Select the display mode.SWITCHING THE DISPLAY MODE

When the shift lever is in any positionother than “R”, the display mode can bechanged in the following procedure.

No. Name Detail

Estimated courseline display mode 255

Parking assistguide line displaymode

257

Distance guideline display mode

Distance guidelines only aredisplayed.

Page 255: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

255

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE

SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No. Display Function

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backedstraight up.• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle

width.• These guide lines align with the estimated course lines

when the vehicle is going straight ahead.

Estimated course lines Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel isturned.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle when the steeringwheel is turned.• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated

course lines.• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5

m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from thecenter of the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide lineShows distance behind the vehicle.• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue)

from the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on theground.

WARNING

● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated courselines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Page 256: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

256

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.

2 Turn the steering wheel so that the esti-mated course lines are within the park-ing space, and back up slowly.

Parking spaceEstimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the vehiclehas entered the parking space, turn thesteering wheel so that the vehicle widthguide lines are within the left and rightdividing lines of the parking space.

Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide lines andthe parking space lines are parallel,straighten the steering wheel and backup slowly until the vehicle has complete-ly entered the parking space.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,and finish parking.

PARKING

When parking in a space which is in thereverse direction to the space describedin the procedure below, the steering di-rections will be reversed.

Page 257: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

257

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE

SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No. Display Function

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backedstraight up.• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle

width.

Parking assist guide lines

Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the ve-hicle.• Shows the approximate position of the steering wheel

when parking.

Distance guide lineShows distance behind the vehicle.• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from

the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on theground.

Page 258: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

258

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.

2 Back up until the parking assist guideline meets the edge of the left-hand di-viding line of the parking space.

Parking assist guide lineParking space dividing line

3 Turn the steering wheel all the way tothe right, and back up slowly.

4 Once the vehicle is parallel with theparking space, straighten the steeringwheel and back up slowly until the vehi-cle has completely entered the parkingspace.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,and finish parking.

PARKING

When parking in a space which is in thereverse direction to the space describedin the procedure below, the steering di-rections will be reversed.

Page 259: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

259

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS

The image adjustment procedure for theparking assist monitor screen is the same asthe procedure for adjusting the screen dis-play. (→P.41)

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

The parking assist monitor displays animage of the view from the bumper ofthe rear area of the vehicle.

Screen

Displayed area

Corners of bumper

INFORMATION

● The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to vehicle orientationconditions.

● Objects which are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper can-not be displayed.

● The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tance of the image that appears on thescreen differs from the actual distance.

● Items which are located higher than thecamera may not be displayed on themonitor.

Page 260: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

260

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

THE CAMERA

The camera for the parking assist moni-tor is located as shown in the illustration.

USING THE CAMERA

If dirt or foreign matter (such as waterdroplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering tothe camera, it cannot transmit a clear im-age. In this case, flush it with a largequantity of water and wipe the cameralens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

NOTICE

● The parking assist monitor may not oper-ate properly in the following cases.• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-

tion and mounting angle of the cameramay change.

• As the camera has a water proof con-struction, do not detach, disassemble ormodify it. This may cause incorrectoperation.

• When cleaning the camera lens, flushthe camera with a large quantity ofwater and wipe it with a soft and wetcloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lensmay cause the camera lens to bescratched and unable to transmit a clearimage.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coat to adhereto the camera. If this happens, wipe it offas soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, suchas when hot water is poured on thevehicle in cold weather, the system maynot operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not applyintensive bursts of water to the cameraor camera area. Doing so may result inthe camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to strongimpact as this could cause a malfunction.If this happens, have the vehicleinspected by your Lexus dealer as soonas possible.

Page 261: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

261

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

The distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines may not actually be paral-lel with the dividing lines of the parkingspace, even when they appear to be so. Besure to check visually.The distances between the vehicle width

guide lines and the left and right dividinglines of the parking space may not be equal,even when they appear to be so. Be sure tocheck visually.The distance guide lines give a distance

guide for flat road surfaces. In any of thefollowing situations, there is a margin oferror between the guide lines on the screenand the actual distance/course on the road.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP SHARPLY

The distance guide lines will appear tobe closer to the vehicle than the actualdistance. Because of this, objects will ap-pear to be farther away than they actual-ly are. In the same way, there will be amargin of error between the guidelinesand the actual distance/course on theroad.

Page 262: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

262

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN SHARPLY

The distance guide lines will appear tobe further from the vehicle than the ac-tual distance. Because of this, objectswill appear to be closer than they actual-ly are. In the same way, there will be amargin of error between the guidelinesand the actual distance/course on theroad.

WHEN ANY PART OF THE VEHICLE SAGS

When any part of the vehicle sags due tothe number of passengers or the distri-bution of the load, there is a margin of er-ror between the guide lines on thescreen and the actual distance/courseon the road.

WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS

The estimated course lines target a flatsurfaced objects (such as the road). It isnot possible to determine the position ofthree-dimensional objects (such as vehi-cles) using the estimated course linesand distance guide lines. When ap-proaching a three-dimensional objectthat extends outward (such as the flat-bed of a truck), be careful of the follow-ing.

A margin of error

Page 263: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

263

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Estimated course lines

ESTIMATED COURSE LINES

Visually check the surroundings and thearea behind the vehicle. In the caseshown below, the truck appears to beoutside of the estimated course lines andthe vehicle does not look as if it hits thetruck. However, the rear body of thetruck may actually cross over the esti-mated course lines. In reality if you backup as guided by the estimated courselines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

DISTANCE GUIDE LINES

Visually check the surroundings and thearea behind the vehicle. On the screen,it appears that a truck is parking at pointB. However, in reality if you back up topoint A, you will hit the truck. On thescreen, it appears that A is closest and Cis furthest away. However, in reality, thedistance to A and C is the same, and B isfarther than A and C.

Positions of A, B and C

C

AB

C

AB

Page 264: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

264

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution,and re-check.If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to see

• The vehicle is in a dark area• The temperature around

the lens is either high or low• The outside temperature is

low• There are water droplets on

the camera• It is raining or humid• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera• Sunlight or headlights are

shining directly into thecamera

• The vehicle is under fluo-rescent lights, sodium lights,mercury lights etc.

Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.(Use the monitor again onceconditions have been im-proved.)The procedure for adjustingthe picture quality of the park-ing assist monitor is the sameas the procedure for adjustingthe screen display. (→P.41)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such aswater droplets, snow, mudetc.) is adhering to the cam-era.

Flush the camera with a largequantity of water and wipe thecamera lens clean with a softand wet cloth.

The image is out of alignmentThe camera or surroundingarea has received a strong im-pact.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

The guide lines are very farout of alignment

The camera position is out ofalignment.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

• The vehicle is tilted (there isa heavy load on the vehicle,tire pressure is low due to atire puncture, etc.)

• The vehicle is used on anincline.

If this happens due to thesecauses, it does not indicate amalfunction.Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.

Page 265: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

265

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

The estimated course linesmove even though the steer-ing wheel is straight

There is a malfunction in thesignals being output by thesteering sensor.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

Guide lines are not displayed The trunk is open.

Close the trunk. If this does not resolve thesymptom, have the vehicle in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

The estimated course linesare not displayed

• The steering wheel hasbeen moved while the 12-volt battery was being rein-stalled.

• 12-volt battery power is low.• The steering sensor has

been reinstalled.• There is a malfunction in the

signals being output by thesteering sensor.

Stop the vehicle, and turn thesteering wheel as far as it willgo to the left and right.If this does not resolve thesymptom, have the vehicle in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page 266: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

266

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST*1

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors*2

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

1 Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off.

When on, the indicator light comes on toinform the driver that the system is opera-tional.

The distance from your vehicle to near-by obstacles when parallel parking ormaneuvering into a garage is measuredby the sensors and communicated viathe multi-information display, RemoteTouch screen and a buzzer. Alwayscheck the surrounding area when usingthis system.

TYPES OF SENSORS

*1: If equipped*2: Except for GS F

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SWITCH

Page 267: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

267

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

■ MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detection*

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

■ Remote Touch SCREEN

With 8-inch displayWhen the rear view monitor system is not

displayed.

A graphic is automatically displayed whenan obstacle is detected. The screen can beset so that the graphic is not displayed.(→P.278)

: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.When the rear view monitor system is dis-

played. (insert display)

A simplified image is displayed on the rightupper corner of the Remote Touch screenwhen an obstacle is detected.

DISPLAY

When the sensors detect an obstacle, agraphic is shown on the multi-informa-tion display and Remote Touch screendepending on the position and distanceto the obstacle.

*: Except for GS F

Page 268: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

268

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

With 12.3-inch displayA graphic will be shown on the side display.

A graphic is automatically displayed whenan obstacle is detected. The screen can beset so that the graphic is not displayed.(→P.278)

: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.

Page 269: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

269

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

■ FRONT CENTER SENSOR*

SENSOR DETECTION DISPLAY, OBSTACLE DISTANCE

Approximate distance to

obstacle

Multi-information

display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display 8-inch display (insert display)

12.3-inch display

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking slowly)

(continuous)

1.6 ft. (50 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous)

1.3 ft. (40 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

*: Except for GS F

Page 270: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

270

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ CORNER SENSORS

Approximate distance to

obstacle

Multi-information

display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display 8-inch display (insert display)

12.3-inch display

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)(blinking)

(continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)(blinking rapidly) (continuous)

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)(continuous)

(continuous)

Page 271: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

271

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

■ REAR CENTER SENSOR

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multi-information display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display (insert display) 12.3-inch display

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

(continuous) (blinking slowly) (continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous) (blinking) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(continuous) (blinking rapidly) (continuous)

Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(blinking) (continuous) (continuous)

Page 272: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

272

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ BUZZER OPERATION ANDDISTANCE TO AN OBSTACLE

The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle.When the vehicle comes within the follow-ing distance of the obstacle, the buzzersounds continuously:• Front center sensors (Except for GS F):

Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft.

(30 cm)• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft.

(35 cm)When 2 or more obstacles are detected

simultaneously, the buzzer systemresponds to the nearest obstacle. If one orboth come within the above distances, thebeep will repeat a long tone, followed byfast beeps.

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)*

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)The diagram shows the detection range of

the sensors. Note that the sensors cannotdetect obstacles that are extremely close tothe vehicle.The range of the sensors may change

depending on the shape of the object etc.

A buzzer sounds when the sensors areoperating.

DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS

*: Except for GS F

Page 273: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

273

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Front center sensors:• The engine <power> switch is in IGNI-

TION ON <ON> mode.• The shift lever is in a position other than P

or R.• The vehicle speed is less than about

6 mph (10 km/h).Front corner sensors:

• The engine <power> switch is in IGNI-TION ON <ON> mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than P.• The vehicle speed is less than about

6 mph (10 km/h).Rear corner and rear center sensors:

• The engine <power> switch is in IGNI-TION ON <ON> mode.

• The shift lever is in R.

There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.(Wiping the sensors will resolve this prob-lem.)The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will

resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is fro-zen the screen may show an abnormal dis-play, or obstacles may not be detected.The sensor is covered in any way.The vehicle is leaning considerably to one

side.On an extremely bumpy road, on an

incline, on gravel, or on grass.The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to

vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, airbrakes of large vehicles, or other loudnoises producing ultrasonic waves.There is another vehicle equipped with

parking assist sensors in the vicinity.The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray

or heavy rain.The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole

or wireless antenna.Towing eyelets are installed.

THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST CAN BE OPERATED WHEN

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DISPLAY

When an obstacle is detected while therear view monitor system, is in use, thewarning indicator will appear in the topright of the screen even if the display set-ting has been set to off.

SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION

The sensor’s detection areas are limitedto the areas around the vehicle’s bum-pers.Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-rounding environment may affect theability of the sensor to correctly detectobstacles. Particular instances wherethis may occur are listed below.

Page 274: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

274

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

The bumper or sensor receives a strongimpact.The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved

curb. In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.The area directly under the bumpers is not

detected. If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered

suspension etc.) is installed. People may not be detected if they arewearing certain types of clothing.

The shape of the obstacle may prevent asensor from detecting it. Pay particularattention to the following obstacles:• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.• Cotton, snow and other materials that

absorb sound waves• Sharply-angled objects• Low obstacles• Tall obstacles with upper sections project-

ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-cle

The following situations may occur duringuse.• Depending on the shape of the obstacle

and other factors, the detection distancemay shorten, or detection may be impos-sible.

• Obstacles may not be detected if they aretoo close to the sensor.

• There will be a short delay betweenobstacle detection and display. Even atslow speeds, there is a possibility that theobstacle will come within the sensor’sdetection areas before the display isshown and the warning beep sounds.

• Thin posts or objects lower than the sen-sor may not be detected for collisionwhen approached, even if they have beendetected once.

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due tothe volume of audio system or air flownoise of air conditioning system.

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions; (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

For vehicles sold in CanadaThis ISM device complies with CanadianICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a lanorme NMB-001 du Canada.

In addition to the examples above, thereare instances in which, because of theirshapes, signs and other objects may bejudged by the sensor to be closer thanthey are.

Page 275: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

275

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

WARNING

● When using the intuitive parking assistObserve the following precautions.Failing to do so may result in the vehiclebeing unable to be driven safely and pos-sibly cause an accident.• Do not use the sensor at speeds in

excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).• The sensors’ detection areas and reac-

tion times are limited. When movingforward or reversing, check the areassurrounding the vehicle (especially thesides of the vehicle) for safety, and driveslowly, using the brake to control thevehicle’s speed.

• Do not install accessories within thesensors’ detection areas.

NOTICE

● When using intuitive parking assist-sen-sorIn the following situations, the system maynot function correctly due to a sensormalfunction etc. Have the vehiclechecked by your Lexus dealer.• The intuitive parking assist operation

display flashes, and a beep sounds whenno obstacles are detected.

• If the area around a sensor collides withsomething, or is subjected to strongimpact.

• If the bumper collides with something.• If the display shows continuously with-

out a beep (except when mute is turnedon).

• If a display error occurs, first check thesensor.If the error occurs even if there is no ice,snow or mud on the sensor, it is likelythat the sensor is malfunctioning.

● Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water orsteam to the sensor area.Doing so may result in the sensor mal-functioning.

Page 276: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

276

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

If the location of sonar that cannot properlydetect obstacles is shown, remove the for-eign matter from the sensor. If the failure warning does not go off even

after the foreign matter is removed, theintuitive parking assist-sensor may be mal-functioning. Have it checked by your Lexusdealer.

All sonar sensors display abnormally. Haveyour vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING

If an error is detected when the intuitiveparking assist-sensor is turned on, thevehicle symbol comes on or flashes withbeeping sounds.

INFORMATION

● The intuitive parking assist-sensor failurewarning display is not given in either ofthe following operations:• Changing to another screen• Turning off the main switch for the intui-

tive parking assist-sensor

WHEN SNOWFLAKES OR MUD GETS ON THE SENSORS

WHEN THE SENSOR IS MALFUNCTIONING

Page 277: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

277

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING*

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select “LEXUS Park Assist”.

5 Select the desired button.

1 Display the “LEXUS Park AssistSettings” screen. (→P.277)

2 Select “1” to “5”.

You can change the warning beep vol-ume and Remote Touch screen operat-ing conditions.

*: If equipped

ALERT VOLUME SETTING

The alert volume can be adjusted.

Page 278: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

278

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “LEXUS Park AssistSettings” screen. (→P.277)

2 Select “Display Off”.

1 Display the “LEXUS Park AssistSettings” screen. (→P.277)

2 Select “Front” or “Rear”.

Long distance or short distance can beselected.

DISPLAY ON/OFF SETTING

On or off can be selected for intuitiveparking assist-sensor display.

INFORMATION

● When the “Display Off” indicator isturned on, the display of intuitive parkingassist-sensor will be off. Select “DisplayOff” again to turn the display of intuitiveparking assist-sensor on.

ALERT DISTANCE SETTING

Front or rear center sensors display andtone indication can be set.

*

*: Except for GS F

Page 279: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

8

279

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 280

2. SOME BASICS ......................................... 281

REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE.......................................... 282

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE ........................... 282

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...................... 283

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST ................................................. 284

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE ............................................. 284

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE.................................................... 285

BY FAVORITES LIST ........................................... 286

BY CALL HISTORY ............................................. 286

BY CONTACTS LIST ........................................... 287

BY DIAL PAD .......................................................... 289

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ................................. 290

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................... 291INCOMING CALLS.............................................. 291

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE.................................................... 292

INCOMING CALL WAITING........................ 294

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION............................................ 295

RECEIVING A MESSAGE ............................... 296

CHECKING MESSAGES.................................. 297

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)................................................. 298

CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER ......... 299

1. PHONE SETTINGS................................ 300

“Sounds” SCREEN ................................................... 301

“Contacts/Call History” SCREEN .................. 302

“Messaging” SCREEN.......................................... 309

“Notifications” SCREEN ........................................ 310

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ......................... 312

1PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

2 SETUP

3 WHAT TO DO IF...

PHONE

Page 280: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

280

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

1. QUICK REFERENCE

The phone top screen can be reached by the following methods:Using the steering wheel switches

Press the switch on the steering wheel.From the “Menu” screenPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

Function Page

Phone operation

Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device 44

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone 285

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone 291

Talking on the Bluetooth® phone 292

Message function Using the Bluetooth® phone message function 295

Setting up a phonePhone settings 300

Bluetooth® settings 50

Page 281: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

281

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

2. SOME BASICS

The hands-free system enables calls tobe made and received without having totake your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth®.Bluetooth® is a wireless data systemthat enables cellular phones to be usedwithout being connected by a cable orplaced in a cradle.The operating procedure of the phone isexplained here.

WARNING

●While driving, do not use a cellular phoneor connect the Bluetooth® phone.

●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®

antennas. People with implantable car-diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchroniza-tion therapy-pacemakers or implantablecardioverter defibrillators should main-tain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® antennas.The radio waves may affect the operationof such devices.

●Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implantable cardiac pacemakers,cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-makers or implantable cardioverterdefibrillators should consult the manufac-turer of the device for information aboutits operation under the influence of radiowaves. Radio waves could have unex-pected effects on the operation of suchmedical devices.

NOTICE

●Do not leave your cellular phone in thevehicle. The temperature inside may riseto a level that could damage the phone.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth®, this system cannot function.

●In the following conditions, the systemmay not function:• The cellular phone is turned off.• The current position is outside the com-

munication area.• The cellular phone is not connected.• The cellular phone has a low battery.

●When using Bluetooth® audio andhands-free system at the same time, thefollowing problems may occur:

• The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.

• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®

audio playback.

Page 282: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

282

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

GS 450h/GS 350/GS 300

GS F

Volume control switchPress the “+” switch to increase the volume.Press the “-” switch to decrease the vol-

ume.

Off hook switch

On hook switch

REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE

To use the hands-free system for cellularphones, it is necessary to register a cel-lular phone with the system. (→P.44)

Bluetooth® PHONE CONDITION DISPLAY

The condition of the Bluetooth® phoneappears on the upper right side of thescreen. (→P.16)

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE

STEERING SWITCH

By pressing the phone switch, a call canbe received or ended without takingyour hands off the steering wheel.

Page 283: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

283

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8GS 450h/GS 350/GS 300

GS F

MICROPHONE

The microphone is used when talking onthe phone.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

The voice command system and its list ofcommands can be operated. (→P.228)

INFORMATION

●The other party’s voice will be heard fromthe front speakers. The audio/visual sys-tem will be muted during phone calls orwhen hands-free voice commands areused.

●Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If both parties speak at thesame time, the other party may not hearwhat has been said. (This is not a malfunc-tion.)

●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, theother party’s voice may be audible out-side the vehicle and voice echo mayincrease. When talking on the phone,speak clearly towards the microphone.

●The other party may not hear you clearlywhen:• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making

excessive traffic noise.)• Driving at high speeds.• The roof or windows are open.• The air conditioning vents are pointed

towards the microphone.• The sound of the air conditioning fan is

loud.• There is a negative effect on sound

quality due to the phone and/or networkbeing used.

Page 284: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

284

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

The following data is stored for every regis-tered phone. When another phone is con-nected, the following registered datacannot be read:• Contact data• Call history data• Favorites data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

The following data in the system can be ini-tialized:• Contact data• Call history data• Favorites data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST

INFORMATION

●When a phone’s registration is deleted,the above-mentioned data is alsodeleted.

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE

A lot of personal data is registered whenthe hands-free system is used. Whenselling or disposing of the vehicle, initial-ize the data. (→P.66)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, the data and settings willbe erased. Pay much attention when ini-tializing the data.

Page 285: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

285

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select the desired tab to call from.The phone top screen can be displayed by

pressing the switch on the steeringwheel.

After a Bluetooth® phone has been reg-istered, a call can be made using thehands-free system. There are severalmethods by which a call can be made, asdescribed below.

How to make a call list Page

By favorites list 286

By call history 286

By contacts list*1 287

By dial pad*1 289

By e-mail/SMS/MMS 299

By POI call*2 87

By off hook switch 290

By LEXUS App Suite 338

By voice command system 234

By quick dial*2 348

*1: The operation cannot be performed whiledriving.

*2: With 12.3-inch display

Page 286: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

286

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select

or the desired contact.The icons of call type are displayed.

: Missed call

: Incoming call

: Outgoing call

When is selected

3 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

When the desired contact is selected

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

BY FAVORITES LIST

Calls can be made using registered con-tacts which can be selected from a con-tact list. (→P.307)

BY CALL HISTORY

Up to 30 of the latest call history items(missed, incoming and outgoing) can beselected from the “Call History” tab.

Page 287: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

287

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select the desired number.The order of the phone numbers that are

displayed may differ from the order shownon the cellular phone.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

INFORMATION

●When making a call to the same numbercontinuously, only the most recent call islisted in call history.

●When a phone number registered in thecontact list is received, the name is dis-played.

●Number-withheld calls are also memo-rized in the system.

●International phone calls may not bemade depending on the type of cellularphone you have.

●The list should group together consecu-tive entries with the same phone numberand same call type. For example, two callsfrom John’s mobile would be displayed asfollows: John (2)

●By pressing the switch on the steer-ing wheel, a call to the latest history itemcan be made.

BY CONTACTS LIST

Calls can be made by using contact datawhich is transferred from a registeredcellular phone. (→P.288)Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4phone numbers and e-mail addressesper contact) can be registered in thecontact list.

Page 288: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

288

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ FOR PBAP COMPATIBLEBluetooth® PHONES

When “Automatic Transfer” is set to on(→P.302)

Contacts are transferred automatically.

When “Automatic Transfer” is set to off(→P.302)

1 Select the desired item.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUTOPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth®

PHONES

1 Select the desired item.

WHEN THE CONTACT IS EMPTY

No. Function

Select to always transfer all the con-tacts from a connected cellularphone automatically.

Select to transfer all the contactsfrom a connected cellular phoneonly once.

Select to cancel transferring.

No. Function

Select to transfer the contacts fromthe connected cellular phone.

Select to add a new contact manual-ly.

Select to cancel transferring.

Page 289: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

289

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

When “Transfer” is selected

2 Follow the steps in “When the contactis not registered” from “STEP 2”. (→P.304)

When “Add” is selected

2 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THE CON-TACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”. (→P.306)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter thephone number.

3 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone is neither PBAP norOPP compatible, the contacts cannot betransferred.

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone:• It may be necessary to perform addi-

tional steps on the phone when transfer-ring contact data.

• The registered image in the contact listmay not transfer depending on the typeof Bluetooth® phone connected.

BY DIAL PAD

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

Page 290: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

290

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the phone top screen.

2 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the “Call History”screen.

3 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to call the latest history item.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH

Calls can be made using the latest callhistory item.

Page 291: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

291

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel to talk on the phone.

To refuse to receive the call: Select

or press the switch on the steeringwheel.To adjust the volume of a received call:Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the vol-ume control switch on the steering wheel.

INCOMING CALLS

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound.With 12.3-inch display: This screen canalso be displayed on the side display.(→P.345)

INFORMATION

●During international phone calls, theother party’s name or number may not bedisplayed correctly depending on thetype of cellular phone you have.

●The ringtone that has been set in the“Sounds” screen sounds when there is anincoming call. Depending on the type ofBluetooth® phone, both the system andBluetooth® phone may soundsimultaneously when there is an incomingcall. (→P.301)

●The incoming call display mode can beset. (→P.310)

Page 292: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

292

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

While talking on the phone, this screen isdisplayed. The operations outlined be-low can be performed on this screen.With 12.3-inch display: This screen canalso be displayed on the side display.(→P.345)

No. Function Page

Select to display the dialpad to send tones. 293

Select to mute your voice tothe other party. ⎯

Select to change handsetmodes between hands-freeand cellular phone.

Select to adjust your voicevolume that the other partyhears from their speaker.

294

Select to send tones. Thisbutton only appears when anumber that contains a (w)is dialed in hands-freemode.

293

Select to hang up thephone. ⎯

Select “+” or “-” to adjustthe volume of the other par-ty’s voice.

Select to start talking withthe other party. 294

INFORMATION

●When cellular phone call is changed tohands-free call, the hands-free screen willbe displayed and its functions can beoperated on the screen.

●Changing between cellular phone calland hands-free call can be performed byoperating the cellular phone directly.

●Transferring methods and operations willbe different depending on the type of cel-lular phone you have.

●For the operation of the cellular phone,see the manual that comes with it.

●With 12.3-inch display: This screen canbe displayed on the main display or sidedisplay. (→P.310)

Page 293: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

293

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

■ BY DIAL PAD

1 Select “0-9”.

2 Enter the desired number.

■ BY SELECTING “Release Tones”

1 Select “Release Tones”.

SENDING TONES

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

“Release Tones” appear when a contin-uous tone signal(s) containing a (w) isregistered in the contact list.

INFORMATION

●A continuous tone signal is a characterstring that consists of numbers and thecharacters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)

●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tonedata up until the next pause tone will beautomatically sent after 2 seconds haveelapsed. When the “w” pause tone isused, the tone data up until the nextpause tone will be automatically sentafter a user operation is performed.

●Release tones can be used when auto-mated operation of a phone based ser-vice such as an answering machine orbank phone service is desired. A phonenumber with continuous tone signals canbe registered in the contact list.

●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can beoperated on voice command during acall.

Page 294: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

294

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “Transmit Volume”.

2 Select the desired level for the transmitvolume.

“Default”: Select to reset the transmit vol-ume.

3 Select “OK”.

1 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel to start talking withthe other party.

To refuse to receive the call: Select

or press the switch on the steeringwheel.

Each time is selected or the switch on the steering wheel is pressedduring an interrupted call, the party who ison hold will be switched.

TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING

INFORMATION

●The sound quality of the voice heard fromthe other party’s speaker may be nega-tively impacted.

●“Transmit Volume” is dimmed when muteis on.

INCOMING CALL WAITING

When a call is interrupted by a third par-ty while talking, the incoming screen isdisplayed. With 12.3-inch display: The incomingscreen can also be displayed on the sidedisplay. (→P.345)

INFORMATION

●This function may not be availabledepending on the type of cellular phone.

●With 12.3-inch display: This screen canbe displayed on the main display or sidedisplay. (→P.310)

Page 295: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

295

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select .The phone top screen can be displayed by

pressing the switch on the steeringwheel.

4 Check that the message inbox screen isdisplayed.

: Select to change to phone mode.

Received messages can be forwardedfrom the connected Bluetooth® phone,enabling checking and replying usingthe system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone connected, received messagesmay not be transferred to the messageinbox.If the phone does not support the mes-sage function, this function cannot beused.

Function Page

Receiving a message 296

Checking messages 297

Replying to a message (quick reply) 298

Calling the message sender 299

Message settings 309

Page 296: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

296

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

RECEIVING A MESSAGE

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is re-ceived, the incoming message screenpops up with sound and is ready to beoperated on the screen.

No. Function

Select to check the message.

Select to not open the message.

Select to call the message sender.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the cellular phone used forreceiving messages, or its registrationstatus with the system, some informationmay not be displayed.

●The pop up screen is separately availablefor incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS mes-sages under the following conditions:E-mail:• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on.

(→P.310)SMS/MMS:• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set

to on. (→P.310)

Page 297: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

297

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the message inbox screen.(→P.295)

2 Select the desired message from the list.

3 Check that the message is displayed.

CHECKING MESSAGES

No. Function

Select “Mark Unread” or “MarkRead” to mark e-mail unread or readon the message inbox screen.This function is available when “Up-date Message Read Status onPhone” is set to on. (→P.309)

Select to reply the message. (→P.298)

Select to display the previous or nextmessage.

Select to have messages read out.To cancel this function, select “Stop”.When “Automatic Message Read-out” is set to on, messages will be au-tomatically read out. (→P.309)

Select to make a call to the sender.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may benecessary to perform additional steps onthe phone.

●Messages are displayed in theappropriate connected Bluetooth®

phone’s registered mail address folder.Select the tab of the desired folder to bedisplayed.

●Only received messages on theconnected Bluetooth® phone can bedisplayed.

●The text of the message is not displayedwhile driving.

●Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use thevolume control switch on the steeringwheel to adjust the message read outvolume.

Page 298: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

298

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the message inbox screen.(→P.295)

2 Select the desired message from the list.

3 Select “Quick Msg”.

4 Select the desired message.

5 Select “Send”.“Cancel”: Select to cancel sending themessage.While the message is being sent, a sending

message screen is displayed.

6 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

■ EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAG-ES

1 Select “Quick Msg”.

2 Select corresponding to the de-sired message to edit.

3 Select “OK” when editing is completed.

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)

15 messages have already been stored.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

INFORMATION

●To reset the edited quick reply messages,select “Default”.

●“Quick Message 1” (“I am driving andwill arrive in approximately [ETA]minutes.”)*:This message cannot be edited and willautomatically fill in [ETA] with thenavigation calculated estimated time ofarrival on the confirm message screen.If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to thenext waypoint will be shown.If there is no route currently set in thenavigation system, “Quick Message 1”cannot be selected.*: With navigation system

Page 299: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

299

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

■ CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/MMS MESSAGE DISPLAY

1 Display the message inbox screen.(→P.295)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select “Call”. If there are 2 or more phone numbers,

select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ CALLING FROM A NUMBERWITHIN A MESSAGE

1 Display the message inbox screen.(→P.295)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select the text area.

4 Select the desired number. Identified phone numbers contained in the

message are displayed.

5 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ CALLING FROM THE INCOMINGMESSAGE SCREEN

→P.296

CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone number.This operation can be performed whiledriving.

Calls can be made to a number identi-fied in a message’s text area.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

INFORMATION

●A series of numbers may be recognizedas a phone number. Additionally, somephone numbers may not be recognized,such as those for other countries.

Page 300: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

300

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. SETUP

1. PHONE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select the item to be set.

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select “Settings”.

No. Information Page

Registering/connecting aphone 50

* Sound settings 301

*Contact/call history set-tings 302

* Message settings 309

* Notification settings 310

*: This operation cannot be performed whiledriving.

DISPLAYING THE PHONE SETTINGS SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

Page 301: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

301

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.(→P.300)

2 Select “Sounds”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Sounds” SCREEN

The call and ringtone volume can be ad-justed. A ringtone can be selected.

No. Function

Select to set the desired ringtone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring-tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the defaultvolume of the other party’s voice.

Select to set the desired incomingSMS/MMS tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incom-ing SMS/MMS tone volume.

Select to set the desired incoming e-mail tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incom-ing e-mail tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the mes-sage readout volume.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of phone, certainfunctions may not be available.

Page 302: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

302

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.(→P.300)

2 Select “Contacts/Call History”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Contacts/Call History” SCREEN

The contact can be transferred from aBluetooth® phone to the system. If yourcellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPPcompatible, the contacts cannot betransferred.The contact also can be added, editedand deleted.The call history can be deleted and con-tact and favorites can be changed.

No. Function Page

For PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones: Selectto change the contact/his-tory transfer settings.

303

Select to update contactsfrom the connected phone. 304

Select to sort contacts bythe first name or last namefield.

Select to add contacts tothe favorites list. 307

Select to delete contactsfrom the favorites list. 308

Page 303: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

303

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones,this function is available when “AutomaticTransfer” is set to off. (→P.302)

1 Select “Automatic Transfer”.

2 Select the desired item to be set.

*Select to clear contactsfrom the call history. ⎯

*Select to add new contactsto the contact list. 306

*Select to edit contacts inthe contact list. 306

*Select to delete contactsfrom the contact list. 307

Select to reset all setupitems. ⎯

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of phone, certainfunctions may not be available.

●Contact data is managed independentlyfor every registered phone. When onephone is connected, another phone’s reg-istered data cannot be read.

No. Function Page SETTING AUTOMATIC CONTACT/HISTORY TRANSFER

The automatic contact/history transferfunction is available for PBAP compati-ble Bluetooth® phones only.

No. Function

Select to set automatic contact/his-tory transfer on/off. When set to on,the phone’s contact data and historyare automatically transferred.

Select to update contacts from theconnected phone. (→P.304)

Select to set the transferred contactimage display on/off.With 12.3-inch display: The contactimage cannot be displayed on theside display when a call is received.

Page 304: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

304

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

■ UPDATING CONTACTS FROMPHONE

1 Select “Update Now”.Contacts are transferred automatically.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

If another Bluetooth® device is connectedwhen transferring contact data, dependingon the phone, the connected Bluetooth®

device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

When the contact is not registered

1 Select “Transfer Contacts fromPhone”.

2 Transfer the contact data to the systemusing a Bluetooth® phone.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Select to reset all setup items.

No. Function TRANSFER CONTACTS FROM PHONE

Page 305: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

305

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

When the contact is registered

1 Select “Transfer Contacts fromPhone”.

2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “AddContact”.

“Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer thecontact from the connected cellular phoneand replace the current one.“Add Contact”: Select to transfer the de-sired contact data from the connected cel-lular phone to add to the current one.

3 Transfer the contact data to the systemusing a Bluetooth® phone.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

■ UPDATING THE CONTACTS(FROM THE “Call History”SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and selecta contact not yet registered in the con-tact list.

3 Select “Update Contact”.

4 Select the desired contact.

5 Select a phone type for the phone num-ber.

Page 306: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

306

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select “New Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

3 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

4 Select the phone type for the phonenumber.

5 To add another number to this contact,select “Yes”.

■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACTIN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE“Call History” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and selecta contact not yet registered in the con-tact list.

3 Select “Add to Contacts”.

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THE CON-TACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”.(→P.306)

1 Select “Edit Contact”.

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Select the desired name or number.

For editing the name

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THE CON-TACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”.(→P.306)

For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THE CON-TACTS LIST” from “STEP 3”.(→P.306)

■ EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIF-FERENT WAY (FROM THE “Con-tact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or“Favorites” tab and select the desiredcontact.

3 Select “Edit Contact”.“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display allregistered e-mail addresses for the contact.

4 Follow the steps in “EDITING THECONTACT DATA” from “STEP 3”.(→P.306)

REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST

New contact data can be registered.Up to 4 numbers per person can be reg-istered.

EDITING THE CONTACT DATA

Page 307: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

307

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

1 Select “Delete Contacts”.

2 Select the desired contact and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

■ DELETING THE CONTACT IN ADIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE“Contact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or“Favorites” tab and select the desiredcontact.

3 Select “Delete Contact”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

■ REGISTERING THE CONTACTSIN THE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Add Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contact to add to thefavorites list.

Dimmed contacts are already stored as afavorite.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

When 15 contacts have already beenregistered to the favorites list

1 When 15 contacts have already beenregistered to the favorites list, a regis-tered contact needs to be replaced. Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears to replace a contact.

2 Select the contact to be replaced.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

DELETING THE CONTACT DATA

INFORMATION

●Multiple data can be selected anddeleted at the same time.

INFORMATION

●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, thecontact data will be deleted at the sametime.

FAVORITES LIST SETTING

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 num-bers per contact) can be registered inthe favorites list.

Page 308: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

308

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Registering contacts in the favorites list ina different way (from the “Contacts”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select (grey) at the beginning of thedesired contact list name to be regis-tered in the favorites list.

When selected, (grey) is changed to(yellow), and the contact is registered inthe favorites list.

Registering contacts in the favorites list ina different way (from the “Contact De-tails” screen)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts” or “Call History”tab and select the desired contact.

3 Select “Add Favorite”.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

■ DELETING THE CONTACTS INTHE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Remove Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contacts and select“Remove”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in adifferent way (from the “Contacts”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select (yellow) at the beginning of thecontact list name to be deleted from thefavorites list.

When selected, (yellow) is changed to(grey), and the data is deleted from thelist.

Page 309: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

309

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in adifferent way (from the “Contact Details”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.285)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or“Favorites” tab and select the desiredcontact to delete.

3 Select “Remove Favorite”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.(→P.300)

2 Select “Messaging”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Messaging” SCREEN

No. Function

Select to set automatic messagetransfer on/off.

Select to set automatic message read-out on/off.

Select to set updating message readstatus on phone on/off.

Select to set display of messaging ac-count names on the inbox tab on/off. When set to on, messaging accountnames used on the cellular phone willbe displayed.

Select to set adding the vehicle signa-ture to outgoing messages on/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

Page 310: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

310

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.(→P.300)

2 Select “Notifications”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Notifications” SCREEN No. Function

• With 8-inch display: Select tochange the incoming call display.

“Full Screen”: When a call is re-ceived, the hands-free screen is dis-played and can be operated on thescreen.“Drop-Down”: A message is dis-played on the upper side of thescreen and can only be operated viathe steering wheel switches.• With 12.3-inch display: Select to

change where the screen is dis-played between the main displayand side display.

“Main Screen”: Select to display andoperate the screen on the main dis-play.“Side Screen”: Select to display andoperate the screen on the side dis-play. For details of the screen: →P.349

Select to set the SMS/MMS notifica-tion popup on/off.

Select to set the e-mail notificationpopup on/off.

Select to change the incoming SMS/MMS display.“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMSmessage is received, the incomingSMS/MMS display screen is dis-played and can be operated on thescreen.“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a mes-sage is displayed on the upper sideof the screen.

Page 311: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

311

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

Select to change the incoming e-mail display.“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is re-ceived, the incoming e-mail displayscreen is the displayed and can beoperated on the screen.“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is re-ceived, a message is displayed onthe upper side of the screen.

Select to set display of the contact/history transfer completion messageon/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

No. Function

Page 312: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

312

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check thetable below.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

The hands-free sys-tem or Bluetooth®

device does notwork.

The connected de-vice may not be acompatibleBluetooth® cellularphone.

For a list of specificdevices whichoperation has beenconfirmed on thissystem, check withyour Lexus dealer orthe followingwebsite: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

∗ ⎯

The Bluetooth® ver-sion of the connectedcellular phone maybe older than thespecified version.

Use a cellular phonewith Bluetooth® ver-sion 2.0 or higher(recommended: Ver.3.0 +EDR or higher).

∗ 48

Page 313: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

313

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

A cellular phone can-not be registered.

An incorrect pass-code was entered onthe cellular phone.

Enter the correctpasscode on the cel-lular phone.

∗ ⎯

The registration op-eration has not beencompleted on thecellular phone side.

Complete the regis-tration operation onthe cellular phone(approve registrationon the phone).

∗ ⎯

Old registration in-formation remains oneither this system orthe cellular phone.

Delete the existingregistration informa-tion from both thissystem and the cellu-lar phone, then regis-ter the cellular phoneyou wish to connectto this system.

∗ 53

Page 314: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

314

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

A Bluetooth® con-nection cannot bemade.

Another Bluetooth®

device is alreadyconnected.

Manually connectthe cellular phoneyou wish to use to thissystem.

⎯ 53

Bluetooth® functionis not enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable theBluetooth® functionon the cellular phone.

∗ ⎯

AutomaticBluetooth® connec-tion on this system isset to off.

Set automaticBluetooth® connec-tion on this system toon when the engine<power> switch is inACCESSORY orIGNITION ON<ON> mode.

⎯ 58

Preferred device set-tings function on thissystem is set to on.

Set preferred devicesettings function onthis system to off.

⎯ 58

Set the desired cellu-lar phone to the high-est automaticconnection priority.

⎯ 58

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 315: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

315

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

When making/receiving a call

“Unable to dial.Please check yourphone.” message isdisplayed.

Bluetooth® functionis not enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable theBluetooth® functionon the cellular phone.

∗ ⎯

Old registration in-formation remains oneither this system orthe cellular phone.

Delete the existingregistration informa-tion from both thissystem and the cellu-lar phone, then regis-ter the cellular phoneyou wish to connectto this system.

∗ 53

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

A call cannot bemade/received.

Your vehicle is in a“No Service” area.

Move to where “NoService” no longerappears on the dis-play.

⎯ ⎯

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 316: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

316

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Phonebook datacannot be trans-ferred manually/au-tomatically.

The profile version ofthe connected cellu-lar phone may not becompatible withtransferring phone-book data.

For a list of specificdevices whichoperation has beenconfirmed on thissystem, check withyour Lexus dealer orthe followingwebsite: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

∗ ⎯

Automatic contacttransfer function onthis system is set tooff.

Set automatic con-tact transfer functionon this system to on.

⎯ 302

Passcode has notbeen entered on thecellular phone.

Enter the passcodeon the cellular phoneif requested (defaultpasscode: 1234).

∗ ⎯

Transfer operationon the cellular phonehas not completed.

Complete transferoperation on the cel-lular phone (approvetransfer operation onthe phone).

∗ ⎯

Phonebook datacannot be edited.

Automatic contacttransfer function onthis system is set toon.

Set automatic con-tact transfer functionon this system to off.

⎯ 302

Page 317: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

317

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

When using the Bluetooth® message function

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Messages cannot beviewed.

Message transfer isnot enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable messagetransfer on the cellu-lar phone (approvemessage transfer onthe phone).

∗ ⎯

Automatic transferfunction on this sys-tem is set to off.

Set automatic trans-fer function on thissystem to on.

⎯ 309

New message notifi-cations are not dis-played.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail recep-tion on this system isset to off.

Set notification ofSMS/MMS/E-mailreception on this sys-tem to on.

∗ 310

Automatic messagetransfer function isnot enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable automatictransfer function onthe cellular phone.

∗ ⎯

Page 318: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

318

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

The Bluetooth® con-nection status is dis-played at the top ofthe screen each timethe engine <power>switch is in ACCES-SORY or IGNI-TION ON <ON>mode.

Connection confir-mation display on thissystem is set to on.

To turn off the dis-play, set connectionconfirmation displayon this system to off.

⎯ 57

Page 319: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

319

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

PHO

NE

8

∗: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

Even though all con-ceivable measureshave been taken, thesymptom status doesnot change.

The cellular phone isnot close enough tothis system.

Bring the cellularphone closer to thissystem.

⎯ ⎯

Radio interferencehas occurred.

Turn off Wi-Fi® de-vices or other devic-es that may emitradio waves.

⎯ ⎯

The cellular phone isthe most likely causeof the symptom.

Turn the cellularphone off, removeand reinstall the bat-tery pack, and thenrestart the cellularphone.

∗ ⎯

Enable the cellularphone’s Bluetooth®

connection.∗ ⎯

Disable the Wi-Fi®

connection of thecellular phone.

∗ ⎯

Stop the cellularphone’s security soft-ware and close all ap-plications.

∗ ⎯

Before using an ap-plication installed onthe cellular phone,carefully check itssource and how itsoperation might af-fect this system.

∗ ⎯

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 320: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

320

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Page 321: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

9

321

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 322

LEXUS Enform Remote....................................... 323

LEXUS Enform Service Connect .................... 323

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE.................................................... 324

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 326

PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite................................................. 327

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................... 328

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 329

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM ................................... 331

1. LEXUS Enform Remote......................... 332

2. LEXUS Enform Service Connect ....... 333

3. LEXUS App Suite..................................... 334USING LEXUS App Suite.................................. 334

LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL FUNCTION ........................................................... 337

ENTERING KEYWORD OPERATION ....................................................... 338

4. LEXUS Enform Destinations................ 339

Destination Assist .................................................... 339

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............. 340

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............................................................. 340

1 LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 2 LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

3 SETUP

LEXUS Enform connected services consists of five products:• LEXUS Enform Safety Connect• LEXUS Enform Service Connect• LEXUS Enform Remote• LEXUS Enform Destinations• LEXUS Enform App SuiteFor availability and to learn more, visit http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

LEXUS ENFORM*

*: With 12.3-inch display

Page 322: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

322

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

The functions included in Lexus Enform are classified into the following three types.Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phoneType B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle

(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation systemType C: Function achieved by using DCM

Each function is available in the following areas:• LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and

Alaska.• LEXUS Enform Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washington

D.C. and limited areas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the appropriate map data.• LEXUS Enform Safety Connect features include:

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location(available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, andCanada) and Enhanced Roadside Assistance (available in the contiguous UnitedStates, Washington D.C., Alaska, and Canada).

Lexus Enform is a service that includes Safety Connect, Service Connect, Remote,Destinations and App Suite.

Function Type

LEXUS App Suite Type A

LEXUS Enform Destinations (Destination Assist) Type B

LEXUS Enform Safety Connect Type C

INFORMATION

●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network receptionlevel.

Page 323: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

323

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

Function of the LEXUS Enform Remote is achieved by using an embedded cellulardevice in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module).

Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C.and Alaska.

The Lexus Enform Service Connect is achieved by using a Data Communication Mod-ule (DCM) built into the vehicle.

Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States,Washington D.C. and Alaska.

LEXUS Enform Remote

LEXUS Enform Remote is a cellular phone application that lets you view and remotelycontrol certain aspects of your vehicle.For details about the functions and services of this application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

LEXUS Enform Service Connect

LEXUS Enform Service Connect uses embedded telematics hardware to collect andtransmit vehicle data that allows Lexus to provide:Vehicle Health Report (VHR)

(Safety Recalls, Service Campaigns, Current Vehicle Alerts, Required Maintenance andVehicle Condition Status)Maintenance NotificationsVehicle Alert Notifications

For details about this service and how to register, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

Page 324: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

324

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform, the App Suite relies on the use of a cel-lular phone.App Suite enables applicable apps installed on a cellular phone to be displayed on andoperated from the navigation screen via a Bluetooth®. A few settings must be per-formed before App Suite can be used. (→P.327)

Page 325: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

325

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink.

No. Name Function

Content provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellularphone.

Cellular phone* Using the App Suite, communication is relayed between thenavigation system, application server and contents provider.

Applications Display usable content from the content providers on the screenusing the data connection of the connected cellular phone.

Navigation system

Content received, via a cellular phone, from content providerservers is displayed on the navigation screen. The navigationsystem is equipped with an application player to run applica-tions.

Page 326: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

326

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

User registration is required to start usingthe App Suite function. (→P.327)App Suite does not require an activation

fee or monthly recurring fees.Services requiring a separate contract can

also be used.**: For details, refer to

http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

LEXUS App Suite is available in the contig-uous United States, Washington D.C. andAlaska.

The following personal data can be deletedand returned to their default settings:• Downloaded contents• Radio stations that were listened to• Input history

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION

INFORMATION

●Data usage fees may apply while usingApp Suite function. Confirm data usagefees before using this function.

●The required operations to activate appli-cations and connect a cellular phone tothe navigation system, and the registra-tion steps for the App Suite are explainedin this section. For details regarding oper-ation of the App Suite and the applica-tions, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

●Availability of functions of the LexusEnform service is dependent on networkreception level.

INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA

The personal data used in applicationscan be reset. (→P.66)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, data will be erased. Payclose attention when initializing data.

Page 327: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

327

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

Perform the settings in the following order.

In order to use App Suite, the followingmust first be performed:User registration with the service

(→P.327)Download the App Suite application onto

your cellular phone, and login to the appli-cation. (→P.327)Register the cellular phone, on which the

App Suite application was installed, withthe navigation system. (→P.327)

Register a Bluetooth® phone with thehands-free system. (→P.44)

Perform user registration at http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or registerwithin the App Suite application after youdownload it onto your cellular phone.

1 Download the App Suite application toyour cellular phone.

2 Run the App Suite application on yourcellular phone.

3 Enter the information required into theApp Suite application. Login to the ap-plication.

PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite

SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE LEXUS App Suite

1 User registration

2 Download the App Suite application toyour cellular phone.

3 Register the cellular phone with thenavigation system.

USER REGISTRATION

REGISTERING THE LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION

INFORMATION

●Applications can only be used when theApp Suite application has been down-loaded to your cellular phone and theapplication is running.

●App Suite operational procedures canalso be confirmed by visiting http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

●In order to use applications, it is neces-sary to run the App Suite application onyour cellular phone.

●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth®

and USB at the same time, system opera-tion may become unstable. For knownphone compatibility information, refer tohttp://www.lexus.com/enform/.

●If a App Suite application is used whileiPod audio/video is being played back,system operation may become unstable.

Page 328: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

328

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect and Lexus Enform Destinations ismade possible through the shared work of the DCM and the navigation system.These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System(GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as wellas convenience features.These services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equippedvehicles and supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24hours a day, 7 days a week.

Page 329: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

329

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and areenrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms are available.Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987), for furthersubscription details. (→P.339)

Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and limitedareas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the appropriate map data.

Enrollment in Lexus Enform Safety Connect (via your dealership) is required to activateall functions.

Certification for Lexus Enform Safety Connect

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION(S)

ACTIVATION OF FUNCTION(S)

Page 330: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

330

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

INFORMATION

●Exposure to radio frequency signals:The Lexus Enform system installed in your vehicle includes a low power radio transmitterand receiver. The system receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

●In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposureguidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistentwith the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.• ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]• NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]• ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

●These standards are based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant sci-entific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, govern-ment health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop theANSI Standard (C95.1).

●The design of Lexus Enform system complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to thosestandards.

●Contact with the Lexus response center is dependent upon the telematics device being inoperative condition, cellular connection availability, navigation map data, and GPS satellitesignal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive support.Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of sub-scription terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected.

●The Lexus response center offers support in multiple languages.●Select Lexus Enform Safety Connect-subscribed vehicles are capable of communicating

vehicle information. Please see the terms and conditions for additional details.Owners who do not wish to have their vehicle transmit this information can opt out at thetime of enrollment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 and following the prompts for LexusEnform Safety Connect.

●For further details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer.●Lexus Enform functions are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and

the system is not TTY compatible.

Page 331: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

331

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM

The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect is made possible by the use of aDCM.For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

Page 332: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

332

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

1. LEXUS Enform Remote

After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement (see the LEXUS EnformSafety Connect section in “Owner’s Manual”), download the LEXUS Enform Remoteapp from your cellular phone’s app store, and register within the app (or enroll and com-plete registration at the dealer), you can begin using these services.

A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further subscription details.

Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C.and Alaska.

For details about the functions and services provided by this app, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION

INFORMATION

●Lexus Enform Remote should only be used by authorized users.●Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when

operating Lexus Enform Remote.In some states, use of Lexus Enform Remote may violate state or local laws. Before usingLexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws.

●Any malfunction of the Lexus should be repaired by your Lexus dealer.●Lexus Enform Remote is designed to work at temperatures above -22 °F (-30 °C). This

specification is related to the Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is dependent on thevehicle’s operating temperature range which may be different.

●Content is subject to change without notice.●Some features of the Lexus Enform Remote may not be available on some models.●Additional information can be found at www.lexus.com/enform/.●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception

level.

Page 333: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

333

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

2. LEXUS Enform Service Connect

Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States,Washington D.C. and Alaska.

For details about this service and how to register, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION

INFORMATION

●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform Service Connect is dependent on networkreception level.

Page 334: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

334

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. LEXUS App Suite

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

3 Select the desired application screenbutton.

: Select to activate an application.“Update”: Select to update the applica-tions. (→P.334)“Reorder”: Select to change the order ofthe applications. (→P.335)

: Displays the number of new notifica-tions for the application

■ DOWNLOADING UPDATE

1 Select “Update” on the “LEXUS AppSuite” screen. (→P.334)

2 Check that downloading starts.“Download in Background”: Select to op-erate other functions while downloading.“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.

USING LEXUS App Suite

App Suite is a function that enables ap-plicable apps installed on a cellularphone to be displayed on and operatedfrom the navigation screen. Before AppSuite can be used, a few settings need tobe performed. (→P.327)For details about the functions and ser-vices provided by each application, re-fer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

UPDATING AN APPLICATION

When App Suite is activated, an applica-tion may need to be updated. By updat-ing the application, it can be kept to thelatest version. To update an application,it is necessary to download update dataand install it.

If an update is available, “Update” canbe selected.

Page 335: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

335

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

3 Check that downloading is complete.“Later”: Select to install later. When thisscreen button is selected, the screen will re-turn to the last displayed screen. To installthe update data: (→P.335)“See Detail”: Select to display detailed in-formation on the update data.“Install”: Select to install the update data.Follow the steps “INSTALLING THE UP-DATE DATA” from “STEP 2”. (→P.335)

■ INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA

1 Select “Install” on the “LEXUS AppSuite” screen. (→P.334)

2 Select “Continue”.“Later”: Select to postpone the installationof the update data and go back to the previ-ous screen.

3 Check that installing is started.“Install in Background”: Select to operateother function while installing.

4 Select “OK” after the installing is com-plete.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(→P.334)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired application to bemoved.

4 Select “<<” or “>>” to move the applica-tion, and select “OK”.

After the downloading is complete,“Update” will be changed to “Install”.

INFORMATION

●The App Suite function cannot be oper-ated while installing.

REORDERING THE APPLICATIONS

Order of the applications can bechanged.

Page 336: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

336

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN

When problems occur with starting the application player, a message will appear onthe screen. Referring to the table below, identify the problem and take the suggestedcorrective action.

Message Display conditions Corrective action

“This feature is unavailableduring an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being im-plemented.

After the Safety Connect callis finished, perform the opera-tion again.

“This feature is unavailablewhile transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being trans-ferred manually from thephonebook.

When the transfer of contactsis complete, perform the op-eration again.

“Unable to connect to aBluetooth* phone. For trou-bleshooting assistance,please visit the Lexus websiteor contact your dealer.”

The cellular phone cannot beconnected.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ toconfirm if the phone is com-patible or not.

“This feature is unavailableduring a handsfree call.”

A hands-free call is in prog-ress.

After the hands-free call is fin-ished, perform the operation.

“To use the services, an activeapplication needs to be run-ning on your phone. For moreinformation, please visitlexus.com.”

The LEXUS App Suite appli-cation cannot be connectedto Bluetooth® SPP.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ toconfirm if the phone isBluetooth® SPP compatibleor not, and then activate theApp Suite application.

“Communication error.Please try again.”

Communication was discon-nected.

After a few moments, retry theoperation.

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by BluetoothSIG, Inc.

Page 337: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

337

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Press the “MAP” button on the RemoteTouch.

2 Select “Dest.”.

3 Select “Web Search”.

4 Check that the “Web Search” screen isdisplayed.

1 Display the “Web Search” screen. (→P.337)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton to perform search.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.

4 Select “Map”.

5 Select “Go to ”.

6 Select “OK” to start guidance.

LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL FUNCTION

The setting a destination and making ahands-free call functions of the naviga-tion system can be performed via AppSuite. For details about the functions andservices provided by each application,refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

SETTING A DESTINATION USING LEXUS App Suite

Locations that were searched for usingthe App Suite can be set as a destination.

For the operation of the route guidancescreen and the function of each screenbutton: →P.106

Page 338: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

338

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Display the “Web Search” screen. (→P.337)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton to perform search.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.

4 Select “Call”.

5 Select “Yes”.“Cancel”: Select to cancel making a phonecall.

6 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(→P.334)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton.

3 Select the character entering space.

4 Enter a search term, and then select“OK”.

5 Entering characters will be reflected onthe character entering space.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(→P.334)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton.

3 Press the talk switch. (→P.228)

4 Say the desired keyword.Completion of the keyword will be

detected automatically.

5 Search results will be displayed on thescreen.

MAKING A PHONE CALL USING LEXUS App Suite

Phone calls can be made to locationswhich were searched for using AppSuite.

For phone operation and the function ofeach screen button: →P.292

ENTERING KEYWORD OPERATION

A keyword can be entered to an appli-cation by the software keyboard orvoice recognition function. For detailsabout the functions and services provid-ed by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

The keyboard layout can be changed.(→P.61)

ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD

For details on operating the keyboard:→P.38

ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION

Page 339: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

339

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

4. LEXUS Enform Destinations

1 Press the “MAP” button on the RemoteTouch.

2 Select “Dest.”.

3 Select “Destination Assist”.

4 When an agent comes on the line, tellthe agent the address, business name,or the type of POI or service.

To adjust the call volume, select “-” or “+”,or use the volume switch on the steeringwheel during the call.To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect”

or press the switch on the steeringwheel.

5 After the agent helps you determineyour location of choice, this screen isdisplayed. Select the screen button ofthe desired action.

Destination Assist

Destinations provide you with live assis-tance for finding destinations via theLexus response center. You can requesteither a specific business, address, orask for help locating your desired desti-nation by category, such as restaurants,gas stations, shopping centers or otherPoints of Interest (POI).After you tell the agent your choice ofdestination, its coordinates are sentwirelessly to your vehicle’s navigationsystem.

MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist

No. Function

Select to register as a memory point.

Select to set as a destination.

Select to display detailed information.

Select to call the registered number.

Page 340: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

340

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

3. SETUP

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

4 Select the items to be set.

The settings of App Suite can bechanged.

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS

No. Information Page

Select to set the voice guid-ance volume. ⎯

Select to set the pop up re-minder for cellular phonedata usage.

341

Select to reset all setupitems. ⎯

Page 341: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

341

3. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set-tings” screen. (→P.340)

2 Select “Mobile Data Usage Notifica-tion”.

3 Check the desired function to be oper-ated.

PHONE DATA PLAN POP-UP SETTINGS

The phone data plan pop-up can be setwhen a paid application is downloaded.

Page 342: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

342

3. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Page 343: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

10

343

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW ...................... 344

FULL SCREEN DISPLAY .................................. 344

SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY................................. 344

2. USING SIDE DISPLAY ......................... 346

BASIC SCREENS .................................................. 346

INTERRUPTION SCREENS ............................ 348

1 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

12.3-INCH DISPLAY*

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 344: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

344

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW

FULL SCREEN DISPLAY

The following functions can be displayed full screen:

Function Page

Initial screen 32

“Menu” screen 14

Map screen 76

SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY

Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For example,audio screen can be displayed and operated while the map screen is being displayed.The large screen on the left of the display is called the main display, and the smallscreen to the right is called the side display.

Main display Side display

Page 345: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

345

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

Basic screens

Interrupt screens

When selecting the main display

1 Move the Remote Touch knob to theleft.

When selecting the side display

1 Move the Remote Touch knob to theright.

MAIN DISPLAY

For details about the functions and oper-ation of the main display, refer to the re-spective section.

SIDE DISPLAY

The following functions can be displayedand operated on the side display.

Function Page

Navigation system 346

Audio 347

Phone 348

Vehicle information “Owner’s Manual”

Air conditioning “Owner’s Manual”

Function Page

Intuitive parking assist* 267

Phone 349

Destination Assist 339

Driving mode* “Owner’s Manual”

*: If equipped

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY

When the split-screen is displayed, it isnecessary to select the screen you wishto operate (main display or side display).

Page 346: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

346

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

2. USING SIDE DISPLAY

1 Select the desired button.

BASIC SCREENS

To change the screen displayed on theSide display, use the screen buttons onthe right side of the display.

SWITCHING THE BASIC SCREEN

No. Function

Select to display the navigationscreen.

Select to display the audio controlscreen.

Select to display the phone screen.

Select to display the vehicle informa-tion screen.

Select to display the air conditioningcontrol screen.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

A map or a compass with informationabout the current position can be dis-played.The orientation can be changed be-tween 2D north-up, 2D heading-up and3D heading-up by selecting the orienta-tion symbol.(→P.81)

Page 347: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

347

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

■ SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE

1 Select “”.

2 Select the desired source.

■ RADIO OPERATION

“ ”, “ ”: Select to tune in to the desiredpreset station/channel.

■ MEDIA OPERATIONAUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

On the side display, preset stations canbe selected.

Operations such as selecting a chapter,file or track are carried out on thescreen.

No. Function

• Select to select a chapter/track/file.

• Select and hold to rewind.

Select to stop the video screen.

Select to play/pause.

• Select to select a chapter/track/file.

• During playback: Select and holdto fast forward.

• During a pause: Select and hold toslow forward.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the audio source, somefunctions may not be available.

Page 348: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

348

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

1 Select the desired contact.

2 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT

1 Select “Add from Favorites”.

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

■ DELETING THE CONTACT

1 Select and hold the screen button tochange the contact.

2 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Select “ ” or “ ” to select the desireddisplay.

HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR CELLULAR PHONE)

When hands-free mode is selected, it ispossible to make call on the side displayif the desired contact is registered on the5 displayed buttons.

A contact can be selected from the fa-vorites list. (→P.307)

INTERRUPTION SCREENS

Intuitive parking assist screen, phonescreen, etc. are displayed automaticallyin accordance with conditions.

SWITCHING THE INTERRUPTION SCREEN

When multiple interruption screenshave been opened, the hidden screenscan be brought forward and displayedonce again. (The driving mode screencannot be displayed again.)

Page 349: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

349

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone→P.285Incoming calls→P.291Incoming call waiting→P.294Talking on the Bluetooth® phone→P.292

■ DISPLAYING ON THE MAIN DIS-PLAY

1 Select .

HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR CELLULAR PHONE)

The following functions can also be dis-played and operated on the side display. For details about these functions, referto the respective section.

INFORMATION

●If side display is selected for any of thefunctions above and the function is acti-vated, the status bar will be displayed onthe side display. For details about the sta-tus bar: →P.16

The screen can be displayed on the maindisplay when carrying out an operationthat cannot be conducted on the sidedisplay.

INFORMATION

●Operation is still possible using the steer-ing phone switch even if the phonescreen is hidden behind another interrup-tion screen. If the operation is conductedusing a steering switch, the phone screenwill automatically be brought to the front.For details on operating the steeringphone switch and the main display:→P.280

Page 350: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

350

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.28 15:01

Page 351: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

351

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INDEX

Page 352: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

352

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Numerics

12.3-inch display ..................................................... 34312.3-inch display operation................................ 34412.3-inch display-overview ................................ 344

Full screen display ............................................. 344Split-screen display........................................... 344

A

AM/FM radio ............................................................ 157Available HD Radio™ Technology ............. 164Caching a radio program ................................. 161Overview ................................................................ 157Preset button screen..........................................160Radio broadcast data system ......................... 163Selecting a station from the list ....................... 161Troubleshooting guide...................................... 166Using HD Radio™ Technology..................... 164

Audio settings .......................................................... 208Audio settings screen...................................... 208

Audio/visual Remote Controls ........................ 202Audio/visual system ................................................145AUX...............................................................................198

External options ...................................................201Overview ................................................................198

B

Basic function..........................................................12, 31Basic information before operation ................... 32Basic operation ................................................. 76, 146Bluetooth® audio..................................................... 192

Connecting a Bluetooth® device .................197Listening to Bluetooth® audio........................197Overview................................................................ 192

Bluetooth® phone message function.............295Calling the message sender ..........................299Checking messages.......................................... 297Receiving a message........................................296Replying to a message

(Quick Reply) .................................................298Bluetooth® settings .................................................. 44

C

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone ....................285By call history .......................................................286By contacts list.....................................................287By dial Pad ............................................................289By favorites list.....................................................286By off hook switch ..............................................290

Casual speech recognization ............................236CD.................................................................................. 175

Overview................................................................ 175Command list ........................................................... 237

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Page 353: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

353

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

D

Data services settings ............................................247Setting download methods.............................247

Destination search..................................................... 93Destination search operation ............................... 93

Destination search by Destination Assist ............................................101

Searching by address.......................................... 96Searching by address book..............................101Searching by coordinates ............................... 104Searching by emergency ................................ 102Searching by intersection and

freeway............................................................... 102Searching by map............................................... 104Searching by point of interest...........................97Searching from previous destinations .........101Selecting search area ......................................... 95Setting home as destination ............................. 95Setting preset destinations as

destination .......................................................... 95Detailed navigation settings .................................132

Screens for navigation settings ......................132DVD ...............................................................................178

DVD options...........................................................181Overview ................................................................178

E

Editing route ................................................................ 118Adding destinations ............................................ 118Deleting destinations .......................................... 119Detour setting .......................................................120Reordering destinations .................................... 118Selecting route type ............................................ 119Setting route preferences................................. 119Starting from adjacent road..............................121

Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation.................................................................. 38Entering letters and numbers.......................... 38List screen.................................................................39

Estimated course line display mode............... 255Parking....................................................................256Screen description............................................ 255

F

Function index .............................................................28Functional overview ...............................................322

LEXUS Enform Remote..................................323LEXUS Enform Service Connect ...............323

G

General settings .......................................................... 61General settings screen ...................................... 61

GPS (Global Positioning System) .................... 139Limitations of the navigation system............ 139

H

Home screen.................................................................18Home screen operation ..........................................36How to use the Remote Touch.............................34

Page 354: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

354

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

I

Information................................................................ 245Information display..................................................246“Information” screen .................................................22Initial screen..................................................................32Internet radio.............................................................. 174

Listening to internet radio................................ 174Intuitive parking assist............................................266

Detection range of the sensors ....................272Display.....................................................................267Intuitive parking assist display .......................273Intuitive parking assist switch ........................266Intuitive parking assist-sensor failure

warning ..............................................................276Sensor detection display, obstacle

distance..............................................................269Sensor detection information........................273The intuitive parking assist can be

operated when ...............................................273Types of sensors..................................................266

Intuitive parking assist setting............................. 277Alert distance setting........................................278Alert volume setting .......................................... 277Display on/off setting........................................278

iPod ................................................................................ 187iPod audio................................................................ 191iPod video................................................................ 191Overview ................................................................ 187

L

LEXUS App Suite...................................................334Entering keyword operation ........................ 338Linking LEXUS App Suite and

navigation system local function.............337Using LEXUS App Suite ................................334

LEXUS App Suite settings..................................340Screen for LEXUS App Suite

settings...............................................................340LEXUS enform ......................................................... 321LEXUS Enform Destinations .............................339

Destination Assist ..............................................339LEXUS enform operation ...................................332LEXUS Enform Remote ......................................332LEXUS Enform Service Connect....................333LEXUS Enform-Overview .................................322Lexus parking assist monitor..............................250

Driving precautions...........................................250Screen display .....................................................252Using the system ................................................253

Lexus parking assist monitor precautions ...........................................................259Area displayed on screen...............................259Differences between the screen and

the actual road................................................. 261The camera...........................................................260When approaching three-dimensional

objects ............................................................... 262Linking multi-information display and

navigation system..................................................43

Page 355: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

355

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

M

Map database version and covered area.......142About the map data ............................................142Map information...................................................142

Map screen information.......................................... 84Displaying information about the icon

where the cursor is set................................... 87Displaying map information ............................. 84Standard map icons .............................................89

Map screen operation ..............................................79Adjusting location in small increments ........83Current position display .....................................79Map scale.................................................................80Orientation of the map.........................................81Screen scroll operation...................................... 82Switching the map mode ................................... 82

Media operation........................................................175Memory points...........................................................122Memory points settings..........................................122

Deleting previous destinations........................ 131Setting up address book ...................................126Setting up areas to avoid ..................................129Setting up home ...................................................123Setting up preset destinations ........................124

“Menu” screen ..............................................................14Status display ............................................................16

Mobile assistant ....................................................... 242Mobile assistant operation.................................. 242

N

Navigation operation ............................................... 24Navigation system..................................................... 75

O

Operating information........................................... 213DVD player and disc.......................................... 214Error messages ...................................................225File information................................................... 220iPod ........................................................................... 219Radio......................................................................... 213Terms.......................................................................223

Operation flow: Guiding the route.....................26Other settings ............................................................... 61

P

Parking assist guide line display mode...........257Parking................................................................... 258Screen description.............................................257

Peripheral monitoring system............................249Phone ...........................................................................279Phone operation (Hands-free system for

cellular phones).................................................. 280Phone settings .........................................................300

“Contacts/Call History” screen.................. 302“Messaging” screen ......................................... 309“Notifications” screen........................................310“Sounds” screen...................................................301

Q

Quick guide.....................................................................11Quick reference ...........................20, 76, 146, 280

Map screen..............................................................76Navigation options screen ................................78

Page 356: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

356

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

R

Radio operation ........................................................ 157Rear seat audio control switches..................... 205Receiving doppler weather information........246

Displaying doppler weather information .......................................................246

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone................291Incoming calls .......................................................291

Registering home .......................................................24Registering preset destinations............................25Registering/connecting Bluetooth®

device .........................................................................44Profiles ...................................................................... 48Registering a Bluetooth® audio player

for the first time..................................................46Registering a Bluetooth® for the first

time.........................................................................44Remote Touch .............................................................. 12Route guidance .......................................................... 110Route guidance screen........................................... 110

During freeway driving ...................................... 113Route overview ......................................................112Screen for route guidance................................ 110Turn list screen....................................................... 116Turn-by-Turn Arrow screen ............................ 116When approaching intersection.................... 115

S

Screen adjustment.......................................................41Setting Bluetooth® details .....................................50

“Bluetooth* Setup” screen ................................50Connecting a Bluetooth® device ..................53Deleting a Bluetooth® device .........................53Editing the Bluetooth® device

information..........................................................55Registering a Bluetooth® device .................... 51“System Settings” screen ................................... 57

Setting home as the destination ........................... 27Setup ..........................................132, 208, 300, 340“Setup” screen.............................................................20Some basics...................................................... 148, 281

About the contacts in the contact list ........284Audio screen adjustment................................. 154Disc slot ................................................................... 150Registering/connecting a Bluetooth®

phone .................................................................282Selecting an audio source ............................... 149“Sound Settings” screen................................... 152Turning the system on and off ........................ 148USB/AUX port .....................................................151Using the phone switch/microphone........282Voice command system........................156, 283When selling or disposing of the

vehicle................................................................284Starting route guidance......................................... 105

Confirm destination screen ............................ 106Entire route map screen .................................. 106

Steering switches ....................................................202

*: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 357: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

357

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

T

Talking on the Bluetooth® phone.................... 292Incoming call waiting........................................ 294

Things you should know....................................... 264If you notice any symptoms ........................... 264

Tips for operating the audio/visual system.......................................................................213

Tips for the navigation system .............................139Traffic information ..................................................... 90

Displaying traffic information on the map ........................................................................ 92

Traffic settings ............................................................137Screen for traffic settings..................................137

Troubleshooting ........................................................312Type A: Function achieved by using a

cellular phone...................................................... 324Before using the function ............................... 326Preparation before using

LEXUS App Suite ........................................ 327Type B: Function achieved by using

DCM and the navigation system.................328Before using the function ............................... 329

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM.........................................................................331

Typical voice guidance prompts ......................... 117

U

USB memory ............................................................. 183Overview ............................................................... 183

Using side display ................................................... 346Basic screens....................................................... 346Interruption screens .........................................348

V

Vehicle settings ...........................................................69Maintenance ...........................................................70

Voice command system........................... 227, 228Using the voice command system ............. 228Voice command system operation.............229

Voice command system operation................. 228Voice settings...............................................................67

Voice settings screen ..........................................67

W

What to do if... ............................................................ 312

X

XM Satellite Radio................................................... 167Displaying the radio ID .......................................171How to subscribe to an

XM Satellite Radio......................................... 169If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions....... 172Overview ................................................................ 167Selecting a channel from the list .....................171

Page 358: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

358

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Map database information and updates

This system uses the maps of DENSO.

Page 359: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

359

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 360: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

360

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 361: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

361

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 362: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

362

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 363: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

363

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 364: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

364

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 365: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

365

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 366: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

366

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 367: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

367

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

U.S.A.

Certification

Page 368: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

368

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Canada

Page 369: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

369

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, PlaylistPlus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc.in the United States and/or other countries

Page 370: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

370

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

Page 371: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION ......1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U) 17.06.28 15:01 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 75 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 145

371

GS_Navi+MM_OM30G43U_(U)17.06.22 22:03

For U.S. owners